Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

ProVU4 Full Manual PDF

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 184

ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

ProVU4 Graphical Controller


with optional Profiling & Recording

User Guide
Part Number: 59407-1
Price: £12.00
$20.00
€18.00
ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

This manual supplements the Concise Product manual(s) supplied with each instrument at
the time of shipment. Information in this installation, wiring and operation manual is subject to
change without notice.

Copyright © March 2008, Danaher Corporation, all rights reserved. No part of this
publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed or stored in a retrieval system, or
translated into any language in any form by any means without the written permission of
West Instruments.
Copies of this manual are available in electronic format on the West Instruments web site
(www.westinstruments.com) Printed versions are available from West or its agents at the
price published on the front cover.
Note:
It is strongly recommended that applications incorporate a high or low limit protective
device, which will shut down the equipment at a preset process condition in order to
prevent possible damage to property or products.

WARNING:
THE INTERNATIONAL HAZARD SYMBOL IS INSCRIBED ADJACENT TO THE REAR
CONNECTION TERMINALS. IT IS IMPORTANT TO READ THIS MANUAL BEFORE
INSTALLING OR COMMISSIONING THE UNIT.

WARNING:
THIS SYMBOL MEANS THE EQUIPMENT IS PROTECTED THROUGHOUT BY DOUBLE
INSULATION.

Products covered by this manual are suitable for Indoor use, Installation Category II,
Pollution category 2 environments.

This user guide covers all versions of the West ProVU4 controller.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Page iii


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Warranty and Returns Statement


These products are sold by West Instruments under the warranties set forth in the following
paragraphs. Such warranties are extended only with respect to a purchase of these products,
as new merchandise, directly from West Instruments or from a West Instruments distributor,
representative or reseller and are extended only to the first buyer thereof who purchases
them other than for the purpose of resale.

Warranty
These products are warranted to be free from functional defects in material and workmanship
at the time the products leave West Instruments factory and to conform at that time to the
specifications set forth in the relevant West instruction manuals sheet or sheets, for such
products for a period of three years.

THERE ARE NO EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE


WARRANTIES HEREIN AND ABOVE SET FORTH. NO WARRANTY IS MADE OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO THE
PRODUCTS.

Limitations
West shall not be liable for any incidental damages, consequential damages, special
damages, or any other damages, costs or expenses excepting only the cost or expense of
repair or replacement as described above. Products must be installed and maintained in
accordance with West Instruments instructions. There is no warranty against damage to the
product resulting from corrosion. Users are responsible for the suitability of the products to
their application.
For a valid warranty claim, the product must be returned carriage paid to the supplier within
the warranty period. The product must be properly packaged to avoid damage from
Electrostatic Discharge or other forms of harm during transit.

Page iv 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

How to use this manual


This manual is structured to give easy access to the information required for all aspects of
the installation and use and of the Graphical Controller. The main sections are shown here,
followed by a full table of contents.

Section 1: Introduction - A brief description of the product and it’s features.


Section 2: Installation - Unpacking, installing and panel mounting instructions.
Section 3: Field Upgrade Options - Installation of the plug-in option modules.

Section 4: Wiring Instructions - Guidance on good wiring practice, noise avoidance,


wiring diagrams and input/output connections.
Section 5: Powering Up - Powering up procedure and descriptions of displays & switches.
Section 6: Messages & Error Indications - Display Messages and fault indications.

Section 7: Configuration & Use - Describes operating and configuration modes available.
These include Operation Mode; the Main and Configuration menus; the Easy Setup Wizard;
Supervisor Mode; Automatic tuning; Product and Service Information. Also available on
some models are menus to setup and use the USB, Data Recorder and Profiler features.
Section 8: The USB Interface Option – Describes uploading or download of instrument
settings, profiles or recorder log to a USB memory stick.
Section 9: The Data Recorder Option – Describes the Data recorder feature. This allows
process data to be stored in to memory for later download and analysis.
Section 10: The Profiler Option – Describe the Profiler feature. A profile controls the value
of the setpoint over time; increasing, decreasing or holding its value as required.
Section 11: Manually Tuning Controllers - Advice on manually adjusting the controller to
the Process characteristics.
Sections 12: Serial Communications - Details the physical layer and message formats
used for the RS485 and Ethernet communications options.
Sections 13: Modbus Parameters - Details the parameter addresses and data formats used
for the Modbus RTU and TCP communications protocols.
Section 14: Calibration - Step-by-step instructions to calibrate the instrument. This section
is intended for use by suitably qualified personnel.
Appendix 1: Glossary - Explanations of the terms used and product features.
Appendix 2: PC Software – Using the software suite.
Appendix 3: Specifications - Technical specifications for all products in the range.
Appendix 4: Product Coding - Product model/ordering codes.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Page 5


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Contents Page Number:

Warranty and Returns Statement .................................................................................................... iv


1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 14
2 Installation ............................................................................................................................ 15
Unpacking ...........................................................................................................................................15
Installation ...........................................................................................................................................15
Panel-Mounting ...................................................................................................................................15
Cleaning..............................................................................................................................................16
3 Field Upgrade Options......................................................................................................... 17
Options Modules and Functions...........................................................................................................17
Preparing to Install or Remove Options Modules..................................................................................18
Removing/Replacing Option Modules ..................................................................................................19
Replacing the Instrument in its Housing ...............................................................................................20
Auto Detection of Option Modules........................................................................................................20
Replacement of Power Supply or Input Boards ....................................................................................20
Data Recorder Board...........................................................................................................................21
Profiler Enabling ..................................................................................................................................21
4 Electrical Installation ........................................................................................................... 22
Installation Considerations ...................................................................................................................22
AC Power Wiring - Neutral (for 100 to 240V AC versions) ....................................................................22
Wire Isolation.......................................................................................................................................22
Use of Shielded Cable .........................................................................................................................23
Noise Suppression at Source...............................................................................................................23
Sensor Placement (Thermocouple or RTD)..........................................................................................24
Thermocouple Wire Identification Chart ...............................................................................................24
Connections and Wiring.......................................................................................................................25
Power Connections ........................................................................................................................26
Universal Input Connections ...........................................................................................................27
Option Slot 1 Connections ..............................................................................................................29
Option Slot 2 Connections ..............................................................................................................30
Option Slot 3 Connections ..............................................................................................................32
Option Slot A Connections..............................................................................................................35
Option Slot B Connections..............................................................................................................36
5 Powering Up ......................................................................................................................... 37
Powering Up Procedure.......................................................................................................................37
Front Panel Overview ..........................................................................................................................37
Display ................................................................................................................................................37
LED Functions.....................................................................................................................................38
Keypad................................................................................................................................................38
6 Messages and Error Indications ......................................................................................... 39

Page 6 Table Of Content 59407-6, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Start-up Errors.....................................................................................................................................39
Input Problems ....................................................................................................................................39
USB Data Transfer Problems...............................................................................................................40
Getting Help ........................................................................................................................................40
7 Configuration and Use .........................................................................................................41
Operation Mode...................................................................................................................................41
Base, Trend & Profile Operating Screens....................................................................................... 41
Adjusting the Local Setpoint(s) ...................................................................................................... 43
Adjusting the Setpoint Ramp Rate ................................................................................................. 44
Selecting Automatic or Manual Mode............................................................................................. 44
Control Enable or Disable .............................................................................................................. 44
Main Menu...........................................................................................................................................45
Entry into the Main Menu............................................................................................................... 45
Unlock Codes................................................................................................................................ 45
Setup Wizard.......................................................................................................................................46
Manual entry to the Setup Wizard .................................................................................................. 46
Supervisor Mode .................................................................................................................................47
Entry into Supervisor Mode............................................................................................................ 47
Configuration Menu .............................................................................................................................48
Entry into the Configuration Menu.................................................................................................. 48
Input Configuration Sub-Menu .............................................................................................................49
Control Configuration Sub-Menu..........................................................................................................50
Output Configuration Sub-Menu...........................................................................................................52
Alarm Configuration Sub-Menu ............................................................................................................53
Communications Configuration Sub-Menu ...........................................................................................53
Recorder Configuration Sub-Menu.......................................................................................................54
Clock Configuration Sub-Menu ............................................................................................................55
Display Configuration Sub-Menu..........................................................................................................55
Lock Code View...................................................................................................................................56
Lost Lock Codes............................................................................................................................ 56
Resetting To Defaults ..........................................................................................................................57
Automatic Tuning Menu .......................................................................................................................57
Profiler Setup Menu .............................................................................................................................58
Profiler Control Menu...........................................................................................................................60
USB Menu...........................................................................................................................................61
Recorder Menu....................................................................................................................................62
Product Information Mode....................................................................................................................62
Service Information Mode ....................................................................................................................63
8 The USB Interface.................................................................................................................64
Using the USB Port..............................................................................................................................64

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Introduction Page 7


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

USB Memory Stick Folders & Files .................................................................................................64


9 The Data Recorder Option ................................................................................................... 65
Introduction .........................................................................................................................................65
Changes To Operation Mode...............................................................................................................65
10 The Profiler Option............................................................................................................... 66
Profile Components .............................................................................................................................66
Profile Starting & Standard Segments..................................................................................................67
Loops Segments..................................................................................................................................68
Profile Running / Holding vs. Hold Segments .......................................................................................68
The Auto-Hold Feature ........................................................................................................................69
Profile Cycles & Repeat Sequences.....................................................................................................70
Power/Signal Lost Recovery Actions....................................................................................................70
Profile End Actions ..............................................................................................................................71
Profile Abort Actions ............................................................................................................................72
11 Manually Tuning Controllers ............................................................................................... 73
Single Control Tuning (PID with Primary Output only) ..........................................................................73
Dual Control Tuning (PID with Primary and Secondary Outputs) ..........................................................74
PI Tuning (Valve, Damper& Speed Controller) .....................................................................................74
Fine Tuning. ........................................................................................................................................76
12 Serial Communications........................................................................................................ 77
Supported Protocols ............................................................................................................................77
RS485 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................77
Ethernet Configuration.........................................................................................................................77
Supported Modbus Functions ..............................................................................................................79
Function Descriptions ..........................................................................................................................79
Exception Responses .....................................................................................................................81
13 Modbus Parameters............................................................................................................. 82
Example Register Address Calculations .........................................................................................82
Universal Process Input Parameters ....................................................................................................83
Option Slot A Parameters ....................................................................................................................85
Option Slot B Parameters ....................................................................................................................86
Option Slot 1 Parameters.....................................................................................................................87
Option Slot 2 Parameters.....................................................................................................................89
Option Slot 3 Parameters.....................................................................................................................92
Option Slot 4 Parameters.....................................................................................................................95
Setpoint Parameters..........................................................................................................................100
Control Parameters............................................................................................................................101
Alarm parameters ..............................................................................................................................103
Recorder & Clock Parameters............................................................................................................105
Display Parameters ...........................................................................................................................108
Profiler Control & Status Parameters .................................................................................................111

Page 8 Table Of Content 59407-6, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Profile Setup Over Modbus ................................................................................................................113


Instrument Data .................................................................................................................................128
14 Calibration...........................................................................................................................129
Calibration Reminder .........................................................................................................................129
Equipment Required For Checking or Calibrating the Universal Input.................................................129
Calibration Check ..............................................................................................................................129
Recalibration Procedure ....................................................................................................................130
15 Appendix 1 – Glossary of Terms Used..............................................................................131
Active Setpoint...................................................................................................................................131
Actual Setpoint ..................................................................................................................................131
Alarm Configuration ...........................................................................................................................131
Alarm Operation ................................................................................................................................133
Alarm Inhibit ......................................................................................................................................134
Alarm Types ......................................................................................................................................134
Alternative Setpoint............................................................................................................................134
Auto Pre-Tune ...................................................................................................................................134
Automatic Reset ................................................................................................................................134
Auxiliary Input....................................................................................................................................135
Auxiliary Input Lower Limit .................................................................................................................135
Auxiliary Input Offset..........................................................................................................................135
Auxiliary Input Type ...........................................................................................................................135
Auxiliary Input Upper Limit .................................................................................................................135
Band Alarm Value..............................................................................................................................135
Bar Graphs........................................................................................................................................136
Bias (Manual Reset) ..........................................................................................................................136
Bumpless Transfer.............................................................................................................................136
Cascade Control ................................................................................................................................136
Clock Configuration ...........................................................................................................................137
Communications Write Enable ...........................................................................................................137
Configuration Menu ...........................................................................................................................137
Contactor...........................................................................................................................................137
Control Configuration.........................................................................................................................137
Control Deviation ...............................................................................................................................138
Control Action....................................................................................................................................138
Control Enable/Disable ......................................................................................................................138
Control Type......................................................................................................................................138
Controller...........................................................................................................................................138
Controller Mode .................................................................................................................................138
Correcting Variable ............................................................................................................................138
CPU ..................................................................................................................................................139

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Introduction Page 9


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Current Proportioning Control ............................................................................................................139


Custom Display Mode........................................................................................................................139
Cycle Time ........................................................................................................................................139
Data Recorder ...................................................................................................................................139
Deadband..........................................................................................................................................139
Derivative Action................................................................................................................................139
Deviation Alarm Value .......................................................................................................................140
Digital Input .......................................................................................................................................140
Direct Acting Control..........................................................................................................................140
Display Configuration.........................................................................................................................140
Display Languages ............................................................................................................................140
Display Resolution.............................................................................................................................141
Engineering Units ..............................................................................................................................141
Ethernet.............................................................................................................................................141
Indicator ............................................................................................................................................141
Input Configuration ............................................................................................................................141
Input Filter Time Constant..................................................................................................................141
Input Range.......................................................................................................................................141
Input Span.........................................................................................................................................142
Integral Time Constant.......................................................................................................................142
Latching Relay...................................................................................................................................142
LED...................................................................................................................................................142
Linear Input .......................................................................................................................................142
Linear Output.....................................................................................................................................142
Limit Controller ..................................................................................................................................142
Local Setpoints..................................................................................................................................143
Lock Codes .......................................................................................................................................143
Logical Combination of Alarms...........................................................................................................143
Loop Alarm ........................................................................................................................................144
LSD...................................................................................................................................................144
mADC ...............................................................................................................................................144
Main Menu ........................................................................................................................................144
Manual Loop Alarm Time...................................................................................................................144
Manual Mode.....................................................................................................................................145
Master & Slave Controllers ................................................................................................................145
Minimum Duration Of Change............................................................................................................145
Modbus RTU .....................................................................................................................................146
Modbus TCP .....................................................................................................................................146
Modulating Valve...............................................................................................................................146
Multi-Point Scaling.............................................................................................................................147
mVDC ...............................................................................................................................................147

Page 10 Table Of Content 59407-6, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

On-Off Control ...................................................................................................................................147


On-Off Differential (On-Off Hysteresis)...............................................................................................147
Operation Mode.................................................................................................................................147
Output Configuration..........................................................................................................................148
Overlap/Deadband.............................................................................................................................148
PD Control.........................................................................................................................................149
PI Control ..........................................................................................................................................149
PID Control........................................................................................................................................149
PLC ...................................................................................................................................................149
Pre-Tune ...........................................................................................................................................149
Power Output Limits ..........................................................................................................................150
Primary Proportional Band .................................................................................................................151
Process High Alarm n Value ..............................................................................................................151
Process Input ....................................................................................................................................151
Process Low Alarm n Value ...............................................................................................................151
Process Variable (PV)........................................................................................................................151
Process Variable Offset .....................................................................................................................152
Profile Control Menu ..........................................................................................................................152
Profile Events ....................................................................................................................................152
Profile Header....................................................................................................................................152
Profile Segments ...............................................................................................................................152
Profile Setup Menu ............................................................................................................................152
Profiler...............................................................................................................................................153
Profiler Mode .....................................................................................................................................153
Proportional Control...........................................................................................................................153
Rate ..................................................................................................................................................153
Rate Of Change Alarm.......................................................................................................................153
Recorder Configuration......................................................................................................................153
Recorder Option ................................................................................................................................154
Recorder Menu..................................................................................................................................154
Relay.................................................................................................................................................154
Remote Setpoint (RSP) .....................................................................................................................154
Retransmit Output..............................................................................................................................154
Retransmit Output n Scale Maximum .................................................................................................154
Retransmit Output n Scale Minimum ..................................................................................................155
Reset To Defaults..............................................................................................................................155
Reverse Acting Control ......................................................................................................................155
RS485 ...............................................................................................................................................155
RTD...................................................................................................................................................156
Scale Range Upper Limit ...................................................................................................................156
Scale Range Lower Limit ...................................................................................................................156

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Introduction Page 11


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Secondary Proportional Band ............................................................................................................156


Self-Tune...........................................................................................................................................157
Sensor Break Pre-Set Power .............................................................................................................157
Serial Communications Configuration ................................................................................................158
Serial Communications Option...........................................................................................................158
Setpoint.............................................................................................................................................158
Setpoint Upper Limit ..........................................................................................................................158
Setpoint Lower Limit ..........................................................................................................................158
Setpoint Ramping Editing ..................................................................................................................158
Setpoint Ramp Rate ..........................................................................................................................159
Setpoint Selection..............................................................................................................................159
Setup Wizard.....................................................................................................................................159
Solid State Relay (SSR).....................................................................................................................159
Solenoid Valve ..................................................................................................................................160
Supervisor Mode ...............................................................................................................................160
Thermocouple ...................................................................................................................................160
Three Point Stepping Control.............................................................................................................160
Time Proportioning Control ................................................................................................................161
Trend Display ....................................................................................................................................161
Tuning ...............................................................................................................................................161
Tuning Menu .....................................................................................................................................161
Triac..................................................................................................................................................162
USB Menu.........................................................................................................................................162
Valve Motor Drive Control (VMD).......................................................................................................162
VDC ..................................................................................................................................................162
VMD..................................................................................................................................................162
16 PC SOFTWARE................................................................................................................... 163
Using The Software ...........................................................................................................................163
Instrument Configuration....................................................................................................................164
Profile Creation And Editing ...............................................................................................................165
Changing the Start-up Splash Screen ................................................................................................167
Changing the Alternate Display Language .........................................................................................167
Instrument Simulation ........................................................................................................................167
Configuring The Connection ..............................................................................................................167
Network Configuration For Modbus TCP Options...............................................................................169
17 Appendix 2 - Specifications............................................................................................... 171
Universal Process Input .....................................................................................................................171
General Input Specifications .........................................................................................................171
Thermocouple Input......................................................................................................................171
Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) Input .............................................................................172
DC Linear Input ............................................................................................................................173

Page 12 Table Of Content 59407-6, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Auxiliary Inputs ..................................................................................................................................173


Digital Inputs......................................................................................................................................174
Output Specifications.........................................................................................................................175
Communications................................................................................................................................177
Display ..............................................................................................................................................178
Control Loop......................................................................................................................................178
Data Recorder ...................................................................................................................................178
Profiler...............................................................................................................................................179
Alarms...............................................................................................................................................179
Conditions For Use ............................................................................................................................180
Standards..........................................................................................................................................180
Dimensions........................................................................................................................................180
18 Appendix 3 - Product Coding.............................................................................................181

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Introduction Page 13


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

1 Introduction
This product is a 1/4 DIN size (96 x 96mm front) microprocessor based graphical process
controller, featuring a 160 x 80 pixel, monochrome LCD with a dual colour (red/green)
backlight. It can control process variables from a variety of sources such as temperature,
pressure, flow and level.
The operating voltage is either 100-240V at 50/60 Hz or 24V-48V AC/DC depending on the
model purchased. Optional features include a USB interface, RS485 or Ethernet
communications, profile controlling and data recording. Non-volatile memory protects against
data or configuration loss during power outages. If the unit is left un-powered, a lithium
battery powers the data recorder’s real-time clock for a minimum of one year.
The USB Interface option allows uploading or downloading instrument configuration settings
to/from a USB memory stick, for easy configuration of multiple instruments or transfer to/from
the PC configuration software. If the Data Recorder of Profiler options are fitted, recordings
and profile information can also be transferred via the memory stick.
The Data Recorder option allows the user to make recordings over time. Recordings can be
transferred to a memory stick using the USB Port or downloaded using one of the
communications options.
The Profiler option allows the user to predefine up 255 segments, shared amongst up to 64
Setpoint Profiles. These control the setpoint level over time, increasing, decreasing or
holding its value as required. When combined with the real-time clock of the Data Recorder
option, the profiling capabilities are expanded to allow automatic program start at a defined
time and day.
Inputs are user configurable for thermocouple and RTD probes, as well as linear process
signal types such as mVDC, VDC or mADC. Multipoint scaling can compensate for non-
linear signals. Output options include relays, SSR drivers, triacs or linear mV/voltage
modules. These can be used for process control, alarms or retransmission of the process
variable or setpoint to external devices. A Transmitter Power Supply option module can
provide an unregulated 24V DC (22mA) auxiliary output voltage for external signal
transmitters.
Alarm indication is standard on all instruments; up to five alarms can be defined. Alarms may
be set as process high or low, deviation (active above or below controller setpoint), band
(active both above and below setpoint), rate of input change, control loop or signal break
types. Alarm status can be indicated by lighting an LED’s, changing the display backlight
colour or viewing the alarm status screen. These alarms can be linked to any suitable output.

The controller can be programmed for on-off, time proportioning, or current proportioning
control implementations, depending on the output modules fitted, and feature manual or
automatic tuning of the PID parameters. A secondary control output is available when
additional output modules are fitted. Optional analogue Remote Setpoint inputs can be
included. Configuration of the major settings is made easy by a Setup Wizard that runs
automatically at first ever power-up or whenever option modules have been changed. Access
to the full range of parameters is via a simple menu driven front panel interface, or the PC
based configuration software.

Page 14 Table Of Content 59407-6, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

2 Installation
Unpacking
1. Remove the product from its packing. Retain the packing for future use, in case it is
necessary to transport the instrument to a different site or to return it to the supplier for
repair/testing.
2. The instrument is supplied with a panel gasket and push fit fixing strap. A single sheet
concise manual is also supplied in one or more languages. Examine the delivered items
for damage or defects. If any are found, contact your supplier immediately.

Installation
CAUTION:
Installation should be only performed by technically competent personnel. It is the
responsibility of the installing engineer to ensure that the configuration is safe.
Local Regulations regarding electrical installation & safety must be observed (e.g.
US National Electrical Code (NEC) or Canadian Electrical Code).

Figure 1. Main dimensions

Panel-Mounting
The mounting panel must be rigid and may be up to 6.0mm (0.25 inches) thick. The cut-out
size is:
92mm x 92mm (+0.5mm / -0.0mm).

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Installation Page 15


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Instruments may be mounted side-by-side in a multiple installation, but instrument to panel


moisture and dust sealing will be compromised. Allow a 20mm gap above, below and behind
the instrument for ventilation. The cut-out width (for n instruments) is:
(96n - 4) mm or (3.78n - 0.16) inches

If panel sealing must be maintained, mount each instrument into an individual cut-out with
6mm or more clearance between the edges of the holes.

Note:
The mounting clamp tongues may engage the ratchets either on the sides or the
top/bottom faces of the Instrument housing. When installing several Instruments side-by-
side in one cut-out, use the ratchets on the top/bottom faces.

CAUTION:
Ensure the inside of the panel remains within the instrument operating temperature
and that there is adequate airflow to prevent overheating.

Gasket Slide mounting clamp over


the instrument housing
Mounting Panel
towards rear face of
Clamp mounting panel until the

Ratchets tongues engage in ratchets


and instrument is clamped in
Instrument
position.
Housing
Hold instrument firmly in
position (apply pressure to
bezel only)

Figure 2. Panel-Mounting the instrument


CAUTION:
Do not remove the panel gasket, as this may result in inadequate clamping and
sealing of the instrument to the panel.

Once the instrument is installed in its mounting panel, it may be subsequently removed from
it’s housing, if necessary, as described in the Fitting and Removing Option Modules section.

Cleaning
Clean the front panel by washing with warm soapy water and dry immediately If the USB
option is fitted, close the USB port cover before cleaning.

Page 16 Installation 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

3 -Field Upgrade Options


Options Modules and Functions
The available plug-in modules, options and accessories are shown in below:

Table 1. Options & Accessories


BOARD
PART
DESCRIPTION IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
NUMBER
OPTION SLOT 1
PO1-R10 Single Relay Output for option slot 1 716/01
PO1-S20 Single SSR Driver Output for option slot 1 716/02
PO1-T80 Triac Output for option slot 1 716/03
PO1-C21 Linear mA / Voltage Output module for option slot 1 639/01
OPTION SLOT 2 or 3
PO2-R10 Single Relay Output for option slot 2 or 3 717/01
PO2-W09 Dual Relay Output for option slot 2 or 3 644/01
PO2-S20 Single SSR Driver Output for option slot 2 or 3 717/02
PO2-S22 Dual SSR Driver Output for option slot 2 or 3 644/02
PO2-T80 Triac module Output for slot 2 or 3 647/01
PO2-C21 Linear mA / Voltage Output for option slot 2 or 3 640/01
PO2-W08 24VDC Transmitter Power Supply for option slot 2 or 3 642/01
OPTION SLOT A
PA1-W03 Digital Input for option slot A 641/02
PA1-W04 Basic Auxiliary Input for option slot A 653/01
PA1-W06 RS485 Serial Communications for option slot A 680/01
PA1-ETH Ethernet Communications for option slot A 707/01
OPTION SLOT B
PB1-W0R Full Auxiliary Input (inc digital input B) for option slot B 641/01
OPTION SLOT 4
PO4-R10 4-Relay Output for option slot 4 703/01
ACCESSORIES
PS1-PRF Profiler Enable Key-code
PS1-PRW PC Configuration Software & Lead

Note:
Modules can be either pre-installed at the time of manufacture, or retrofitted in the field.
CAUTION:
Plastic pegs prevent fitting of older non-reinforced single relay modules (Board
Identification Numbers 637/01 and 638/01). Fitting the older relay modules reduces
the isolation rating to Basic 240V Isolation and is therefore not recommended.
Remove this peg when fitting Dual Relay Modules.
Note:
All dual relay modules have reinforced isolation.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Field Upgrade Options Page 17


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Board Positions

Board Mounting Struts


Option 4 Module
Option A Module
Option 3 Module
Universal Input Board
Power Supply Board

Option B Module
Option 1 Module
(hidden below B)
Option 2 Module

Option C Module

Figure 3. Rear view (uncased) & board positions

Preparing to Install or Remove Options Modules


CAUTION:
Before removing the instrument from it’s housing, ensure that all power has been
removed from the rear terminals. Modules / boards should only be replaced by a
trained technician.

1. Remove the instrument from its housing by gripping the edges of the front panel (there is a
finger grip on each edge) and pull the instrument forwards. This will release the instrument
from the rear connectors in the housing and will give access to the boards.
2. Take note of the orientation of the instrument for subsequent replacement into the
housing. The positions of the boards in the instrument are shown above.

Page 18 Field Upgrade Options 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Main Board Connectors

POWER SUPPLY Option 3 Slot


BOARD Connector PL4B
Transformer Colour
Code
Option Slot A
100-240V (Yellow)
Connectors PL5, & PL6
24-48V(Blue)
Option 1 Slot
Connectors PL7 & PL8

Display Board PC Configurator


Connections Socket SK1

Option 2 Slot
Connector PL4A
UNIVERSAL INPUT
BOARD
Option Slot B
Connectors PL2A, PL2B &
PL2C

Figure 4. Main board connectors

Removing/Replacing Option Modules


1. To remove or replace modules in Option Slots 1, 2, 3, A or B, it is necessary to detach the
Power Supply and Input boards from the front panel by lifting first the upper and then
lower mounting struts.
2. Remove or fit the modules to the connectors on the Power Supply and Input boards. The
location of the connectors is shown below. Plastic pegs prevent fitting of older non-
reinforced single relay modules – Remove the peg to fit dual relay modules
3. Assemble the Power Supply and Input boards together. Tongues on each option module
locate into a slots cut into the main boards, opposite each of the connectors. Hold the
Power and Input boards together and relocate them back on their mounting struts.

4. Remove or replace the Slot C and 4 modules as required.


5. Push the boards forward to ensure correct connection to the front Display/CPU board.
CAUTION:
Check for correct orientation of the modules and that all pins are located correctly.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Field Upgrade Options Page 19


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Replacing the Instrument in its Housing


CAUTION:
Before replacing the instrument in it’s housing, ensure that all power has been
removed from the rear terminals.

With the required option modules correctly located into their respective positions the
instrument can be replaced into it’s housing as follows:

1. Hold the Power Supply and Input boards together.


2. Align the boards with the guides in the housing.
3. Slowly and firmly, push the instrument in position.
CAUTION:
Ensure that the instrument is correctly orientated. A mechanical stop will operate if
an attempt is made to insert the instrument in the wrong orientation, this stop MUST
NOT be over-ridden.

Auto Detection of Option Modules


The instrument automatically detects which option modules have been fitted into each slot.
The menus and screens change to reflect the options compatible with the hardware fitted.
The modules fitted can be viewed in the products information menu, as detailed in the
Product Information Mode section of this manual.

Replacement of Power Supply or Input Boards


It is recommend that users change these boards only if unavoidable.

1. Remove the instrument from it’s housing as detailed above.


2. Remove all option modules.
3. Replace the Power Supply or Input board as required. Carefully observe the transformer
colour and the case labelling to check the supply voltage when replacing the power
supply board.
4. Reassemble the unit in it’s case.
5. If the input board has to be replaced, a full recalibration must be carried out before the
instrument is used. Refer to the calibration section of this manual for instructions.
CAUTION:
Replacement of boards must be carried out by a trained technician.
If the Power Supply board does not match the labelling, users may apply incorrect
voltage resulting in irreparable damage.

Page 20 Field Upgrade Options 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Data Recorder Board


If installed, the Data Recorder memory and Real Time Clock (RTC) components are located
on a plug-in daughter board attached to the front Display/CPU board.
CAUTION:
Servicing of the Data Recorder/RTC circuit and replacement of the lithium battery
should only be carried out by a trained technician.

Profiler Enabling
If you purchased a controller with the Profiler option installed, these features will be enabled
during manufacture.
Controllers supplied without the Profiler option installed can be upgraded in the field by
purchasing a licence code number from your supplier. A unique code must be purchased to
enable profiling on each controller that requires it.

Entering A Profiler Enable Code


Hold down the  and  keys during the power-up “splash screen”.

Using the or keys, enter the 16-character licence code in the displayed screen.
Press to move on to the next character. Press to move back to the previous
character.

Press after entering the final character.

To confirm if profiling is installed in your instrument, refer to the Controller Feature


Information in Product Information mode.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Field Upgrade Options Page 21


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

4 Electrical Installation
CAUTION:
Installation should be only performed by technically competent personnel. It is the
responsibility of the installing engineer to ensure that the configuration is safe.
Local Regulations regarding electrical installation & safety must be observed (e.g.
US National Electrical Code (NEC) or Canadian Electrical Code).

Installation Considerations
Ignition transformers, arc welders, motor drives, mechanical contact relays and solenoids are
examples of devices that generate electrical noise in typical industrial environments. The
following guidelines MUST be followed to minimise their effects.
1. If the instrument is being installed in existing equipment, the wiring in the area should be
checked to ensure that good wiring practices have been followed.
2. Noise-generating devices such as those listed should be mounted in a separate
enclosure. If this is not possible, separate them from the instrument, by the largest
distance possible.
3. If possible, eliminate mechanical contact relays and replace with solid-state relays. If a
mechanical relay being powered by an output of this instrument cannot be replaced, a
solid-state relay can be used to isolate the instrument.
4. A separate isolation transformer to feed only the instrumentation should be considered.
The transformer can isolate the instrument from noise found on the AC power input.

AC Power Wiring - Neutral (for 100 to 240V AC versions)


It is good practice to ensure that the AC neutral is at or near ground (earth) potential. A
proper neutral will help ensure maximum performance from the instrument.

Wire Isolation
Four voltage levels of input and output wiring may be used with the unit:
1. Analogue input or output (for example thermocouple, RTD, VDC, mVDC or mADC)
2. Relays & Triac outputs
3. SSR Driver outputs

4. AC power
CAUTION:
The only wires that should run together are those of the same category.

If any wires need to run parallel with any other lines, maintain a minimum space of 150mm
between them.
If wires MUST cross each other, ensure they do so at 90 degrees to minimise interference.

Page 22 Wiring Instructions 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Use of Shielded Cable


All analogue signals must use shielded cable. This will help eliminate electrical noise
induction on the wires. Connection lead length must be kept as short as possible keeping the
wires protected by the shielding. The shield should be grounded at one end only. The
preferred grounding location is at the sensor, transmitter or transducer.

Noise Suppression at Source


Usually when good wiring practices are followed, no further noise protection is necessary.
Sometimes in severe electrical environments, the amount of noise is so great that it has to be
suppressed at source. Many manufacturers of relays, contactors etc supply 'surge
suppressors' which mount on the noise source. For those devices that do not have surge
suppressors supplied, Resistance-Capacitance (RC) networks and/or Metal Oxide Varistors
(MOV) may be added.
Inductive coils:- MOVs are recommended for transient suppression in inductive coils,
connected in parallel and as close as possible to the coil. Additional protection may be
provided by adding an RC network across the MOV.

Figure 5. Transient suppression with inductive coils


Contacts:- Arcing may occur across contacts when they open and close. This results in
electrical noise as well as damage to the contacts. Connecting a properly sized RC network
can eliminate this arc.
For circuits up to 3 amps, a combination of a 47 ohm resistor and 0.1 microfarad capacitor
(1000 volts) is recommended. For circuits from 3 to 5 amps, connect two of these in parallel.

Figure 6. Contact noise suppression

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Wiring Instructions Page 23


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Sensor Placement (Thermocouple or RTD)


If the temperature probe is to be subjected to corrosive or abrasive conditions, it must be
protected by an appropriate thermowell. The probe must be positioned to reflect true process
temperature:
1. In a liquid media - the most agitated area
2. In air - the best circulated area
CAUTION:
The placement of probes into pipe work some distance from the heating vessel
leads to transport delay, which results in poor control.

For a two wire RTD a wire link should be used in place of the third wire. Two wire RTDs must
only be used with lead lengths less than 3 metres. Use of three wire RTDs is strongly
recommended.

Thermocouple Wire Identification Chart


The different thermocouple types are identified by their wires colour, and where possible, the
outer insulation as well. There are several standards in use throughout the world.
The table below shows the wire and sheath colours used for most + Wire
Sheath
common thermocouple types. The format used in this table is: - Wire
Table 2. Thermocouple Extension Wire Colours

Type International USA ANSI British French German


IEC584-3 MC 96.1 BS1843 NFC 42-324 DIN 43710
+* Black White Yellow Yellow Red
J Black Black Black Black Blue
- White Red Blue Black Blue

+ Brown Blue White Yellow Red


T Brown Blue Blue Blue Brown
- White Red Blue Blue Brown

+ Green Yellow Brown Yellow Red


K Green Yellow Red Yellow Green
-* White Red Blue Purple Green

+ Pink Orange Orange


N Pink Orange Orange
- White Red Blue

+ Grey Grey Red


B Grey Grey Grey
- White Red Grey

+ Orange Black White Yellow Red


R&S Orange Green Green Green White
- White Red Blue Green White

+ White
C (W5) White
- Red

Note:
* = Wire is magnetic

Page 24 Wiring Instructions 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Connections and Wiring

This symbol means the equipment is protected throughout by double insulation.


CAUTION:
All external circuits connected must provide double insulation. Failure to comply
with the installation instructions may impact the protection provided by the unit.
WARNING:
TO AVOID ELECTRICAL SHOCK, AC POWER WIRING MUST NOT BE CONNECTED TO THE
SOURCE DISTRIBUTION PANEL UNTIL ALL WIRING PROCEDURES ARE COMPLETED.
CHECK THE INFORMATION LABEL ON THE CASE TO DETERMINE THE CORRECT
VOLTAGE BEFORE CONNECTING TO A LIVE SUPPLY.

Note:
The wiring diagram below shows all possible combinations to the main connections
(numbered 1 to 24) in the centre of the case rear. The actual connections required depend
upon the features available on the model and the modules and options fitted.

Figure 7. Main Rear terminals


Note:

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Wiring Instructions Page 25


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

The wiring diagram below shows the additional connections (numbered 25 to 42) at the
sides of the case rear. These are required for Options Slots 4 and C if fitted.

Figure 8. Additional Option terminals


Note:
Use single strand (1.2mm / AWG18 max size) copper wire throughout, except for the
thermocouple input, where the correct thermocouple or compensating cable and
connectors must be used.

Power Connections

Power Connections - Mains Powered Instruments


Mains powered instruments operate from a 100 to 240V (±10%) 50/60Hz supply. Power
consumption is 20VA. Connect the line voltage (live and neutral) as illustrated via a two-pole
IEC60947-1 & IEC60947-3 compliant isolation switch / circuit breaker and a UL listed fuse
type: 250V AC 1Amp anti-surge. If the instrument has relay outputs with contacts carrying
mains voltage, it is recommended that the relay contacts supply should be switched and
fused in a similar manner, but should be separate from the instruments mains supply.

13 L

14 N

Figure 9. Mains Power Connections


WARNING:
CHECK THE INFORMATION LABEL ON THE CASE TO DETERMINE THE CORRECT
VOLTAGE BEFORE CONNECTING TO A LIVE SUPPLY.

CAUTION:
This equipment is designed for installation in an enclosure that provides adequate
protection against electric shock. The isolation switch should be located in close
proximity to the unit, in easy reach of the operator and appropriately marked.

Page 26 Wiring Instructions 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Power Connections - 24/48V AC/DC Powered Instruments


24/48V AD/DC powered instruments will operate from a 20 to 48V AC or 22 to 55V DC
supply. AC power consumption is 15VA max, DC power consumption is 12 watts max.
Connection should be via a two-pole IEC60947-1 & IEC60947-3 compliant isolation switch /
circuit breaker and a UL listed fuse type: 65v dc 1Aamp anti-surge.

13 _

14

+

Figure 10. 24/48V AC/DC Power Connections


WARNING:
CHECK THE INFORMATION LABEL ON THE CASE TO DETERMINE THE CORRECT
VOLTAGE BEFORE CONNECTING TO A LIVE SUPPLY.

CAUTION:
This equipment is designed for installation in an enclosure that provides adequate
protection against electric shock. The isolation switch should be located in close
proximity to the unit, in easy reach of the operator and appropriately marked.

Universal Input Connections

Universal Input Connections - Thermocouple (T/C)


Use only the correct thermocouple wire or compensating cable from the probe to the
instrument terminals avoiding joints in the cable if possible. Failure to use the correct wire
type will lead to inaccurate readings. Ensure correct polarity of the wires by cross-
referencing the colours with a thermocouple reference table.

3 _

2 +

Figure 11. Thermocouple Input Connections

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Wiring Instructions Page 27


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Universal Input Connections – PT100 / NI120 (RTD) input


For three wire RTDs, connect the resistive leg and the common legs of the RTD as
illustrated. For a two wire RTD a wire link should be used in place of the third wire (shown by
dotted line). Two wire RTDs should only be used when the leads are less than 3 metres long.
Avoid cable joints.

RTD
1

Figure 12. RTD Input Connections


Four wire RTDs can be used, provided that the fourth wire is left unconnected. This wire
should be cut short or tied back so that it cannot contact any of the terminals on the rear of
the instrument.

Universal Input Connections - Linear Volt, mV or mA input


Linear DC voltage, millivolt or milliamp input connections are made as illustrated. Carefully
observe the polarity of the connections.

4 +

3 _

2 +

1 _
mV/V

mA

Figure 13. DC Volt, mV & mA Input Connections

Page 28 Wiring Instructions 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Option Slot 1 Connections

Option Slot 1 – Single Relay Output Module


If option slot 1 is fitted with a single relay output module, make connections as illustrated.
The relay contacts are SPDT and rated at 2 amps resistive, 240 VAC.

19 N/C

20 COM

21 N/O

Figure 14. Option Slot 1 – Single Relay Module

Option Slot 1 – Single SSR Driver Output Module


If option slot 1 is fitted with a single SSR driver output module, make connections as
illustrated. The solid-state relay driver is a 0-10V DC signal, load impedance must be no less
than 500 ohms. SSR driver outputs are not isolated from the signal input or other SSR driver
outputs.

19 _

20

21 +

Figure 15. Option Slot 1 – Single SSR Driver Module

Option Slot 1 - Triac Output Module


If option slot 1 is fitted with a Triac output module, make connections as shown. This output
is rated at 0.01 to 1 amp @ 280V AC 50/60Hz. A snubber should be fitted across inductive
loads to ensure reliable switch off the Triac.

20

21

Figure 16. Option Slot 1 - Triac Module

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Wiring Instructions Page 29


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Option Slot 1 - Linear Voltage or mADC Output module


If option slot 1 is fitted with a DC linear output module, make connections as illustrated.

19 _

20

21 +

Figure 17. Option Slot 1 - Linear Voltage & mADC Module

Option Slot 2 Connections

Option Slot 2 – Single Relay Output Module


If option slot 2 is fitted with a single relay output module, make connections as illustrated.
The relay contacts are SPDT, and rated at 2 amps resistive, 240 VAC.

22 N/C

23 COM

24 N/O

Figure 18. Option Slot 2 – Single Relay Module

Option Slot 2 - Dual Relay Output Module


If option slot 2 is fitted with a dual relay output module, make connections as illustrated. This
module has two independent SPST relays, which share a common connection terminal. The
contacts are rated at 2 amp resistive 240 VAC.

22 N/O OUTPUT 2B

23 COMMON

24 N/O OUTPUT 2A

Figure 19. Option Slot 2 - Dual Relay Module

Page 30 Wiring Instructions 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Option Slot 2 – Single SSR Driver Output Module


If option slot 2 is fitted with a single SSR driver output module, make connections as
illustrated. The solid-state relay driver is a 0-10V DC signal, load impedance must be no less
than 500 ohms. SSR driver outputs are not isolated from the signal input or other SSR driver
outputs.

22 _

23

24 +

Figure 20. Option Slot 2 – Single SSR Driver Module

Option Slot 2 – Dual SSR Driver Output Module


If option slot 2 is fitted with a dual SSR driver output module, make connections as
illustrated. The solid-state relay drivers are a 0-10V DC signal, load impedance must be no
less than 500 ohms. SSR driver outputs are not isolated from the signal input or other SSR
driver outputs.

22 - OUTPUT 2A
23 - OUTPUT 2B
24
+ COMMON
Figure 21. Option Slot 2 – Dual SSR Driver Module

Option Slot 2 - Triac Output Module


If option slot 2 is fitted with a Triac output module, make connections as shown. This output
is rated at 0.01 to 1 amp @ 280V AC 50/60Hz. A snubber should be fitted across inductive
loads to ensure reliable switch off the Triac.

23

24

Figure 22. Option Slot 2 - Triac Module

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Wiring Instructions Page 31


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Option Slot 2 - Linear Voltage or mADC Output module


If option slot 2 is fitted with a DC linear output module, make connections as illustrated.

22 _

23

24 +

Figure 23. Option Slot 2 - Linear Voltage & mADC module

Option Slot 2 - Transmitter Power Supply Module


If option slot 2 is fitted with a transmitter power supply module, make connections as
illustrated. The output is an unregulated 24V DC, 22mA supply.

22 _

23

24 +

Figure 24. Option Slot 2 - Transmitter Power Supply Module

Option Slot 3 Connections

Option Slot 3 – Single Relay Output Module


If option slot 3 is fitted with a single relay output module, make connections as illustrated.
The relay contacts are SPDT, and rated at 2 amps resistive, 240 VAC.

10 N/C

11 COM

12 N/O

Figure 25. Option Slot 3 – Single Relay Module

Page 32 Wiring Instructions 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Option Slot 3 - Dual Relay Output Module


If option slot 3 is fitted with a dual relay output module, make connections as illustrated. This
module has two independent SPST relays, which share a common connection terminal. The
contacts are rated at 2 amp resistive 240 VAC.

10 N/O OUTPUT 3B

11 COMMON

12 N/O OUTPUT 3A

Figure 26. Option Slot 3 - Dual Relay Module

Option Slot 3 – Single SSR Driver Output Module


If option slot 3 is fitted with a single SSR driver output module, make connections as
illustrated. The solid-state relay driver is a 0-10V DC signal, load impedance must be no less
than 500 ohms. SSR driver outputs are not isolated from the signal input or other SSR driver
outputs.

10 _

11

12 +

Figure 27. Option Slot 3 – Single SSR Driver Module

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Wiring Instructions Page 33


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Option Slot 3 – Dual SSR Driver Output Module


If option slot 3 is fitted with a dual SSR driver output module, make connections as
illustrated. The solid-state relay drivers are a 0-10V DC signal, load impedance must be no
less than 500 ohms. SSR driver outputs are not isolated from the signal input or other SSR
driver outputs.

10 - OUTPUT 3A
11 - OUTPUT 3B
12 + COMMON
Figure 28. Option Slot 3 – Dual SSR Driver Module

Option Slot 3 - Triac Output Module


If option slot 3 is fitted with a Triac output module, make connections as shown. This output
is rated at 0.01 to 1 amp @ 280V AC 50/60Hz. A snubber should be fitted across inductive
loads to ensure reliable switch off the Triac.

10

11

Figure 29. Option Slot 3 - Triac Module

Option Slot 3 - Linear Voltage or mADC Output module


If option slot 3 is fitted with a DC linear output module, make connections as illustrated.

10 _

11

12 +

Figure 30. Option Slot 3 - Linear Voltage & mADC module

Page 34 Wiring Instructions 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Option Slot 3 - Transmitter Power Supply Module


If option slot 3 is fitted with a transmitter power supply module, make connections as
illustrated. The output is an unregulated 24V DC, 22mA supply.

10 _

11

12 +

Figure 31. Option Slot 3 - Transmitter Power Supply Module

Option Slot A Connections

Option Slot A Connections – Basic Auxiliary Input Module


If option slot A is fitted with a basic auxiliary input module, connect as shown. It is
recommend that the full auxiliary input (Option Slot B) is used instead, as this has additional
features and leaves option slot A free for other modules.

16 +

17 _

Figure 32. Option Slot A – Basic Auxiliary Input Module

Option Slot A Connections - Digital Input Module


If a digital input module is fitted in option slot A, this may be connected to either voltage free
contacts (e.g. switch or relay), or a TTL compatible voltage. Connections are shown below.

16 +

17 _

Figure 33. Option Slot A – Digital Input Module

Option Slot A Connections - Ethernet Communications Module


If option slot A is fitted with the Ethernet communication module, a standard RJ45 connector
is accessible from the top of case. No rear connections are required.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Wiring Instructions Page 35


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Option Slot A Connections - RS485 Serial Communications Module


If option slot A is fitted with the RS485 serial communication module, connections are as
illustrated. Carefully observe the polarity of the A (Rx/Tx +ve) and B (Rx/Tx -ve) connections.

16 A

17 B RS485

18 COM

Figure 34. Option Slot A – RS485 Serial Communications Module


CAUTION:
External computing devices connected to the communications port should comply
with the standard, UL 60950.

Option Slot B Connections

Option Slot B Connections – Digital Input 2 (Full Auxiliary Module)


If option slot B is fitted with the Full Auxiliary input module (see below), a secondary digital
input is also provided. This may be connected to the voltage free contacts of a switch or
relay, or to a TTL compatible voltage.

9 +

8 _

Figure 35. Option Slot B – Digital Input 2 Connections

Option Slot B Connections – 1/4 DIN & 1/8 DIN Full Auxiliary Input Module
If option slot B is fitted with full auxiliary input feature, input connections are as shown.

7 + (or Pot Low)

6 _ (or Pot Wiper)

5 (or Pot High)

Figure 36. Option Slot B – Full Auxiliary Input Connections

Page 36 Wiring Instructions 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

5 Powering Up
CAUTION:
Ensure safe wiring practices have been followed. When powering up for the first
time, disconnect the output connections.

The instrument must be powered from a supply according to the wiring label on the side of
the unit. The supply will be either 100 to 240V AC, or 24/48V AC/DC powered. Check
carefully the supply voltage and connections before applying power.

Powering Up Procedure
At power up, a self-test procedure is automatically started, during which a splash screen is
displayed and the LED indicators are lit. At the first power up from new, or if the option
modules are changed, the Setup Wizard will run, indicating configuration is required (refer to
the Setup Wizard section of this manual). At all other times, the instrument returns to
Operation Mode once the self-test procedure is complete.

Front Panel Overview


The illustration below shows the instrument front panel. The USB socket to the right of the
keypad is fitted to USB and Data Recorder versions only.
Clean the front panel by washing with warm soapy water and dry immediately If the USB
option is fitted, close the USB port cover before cleaning.

Figure 37. Front panel and keys

Display
The instrument has a 160 x 80 pixel monochrome graphical display with dual colour
(red/green) backlight. The main display typically shows the process variable and setpoint
values or a graphical trend during normal operation. There are various bar graph, recorder
status and profile status information options (refer to the Display Configuration section for
more details). The top line of the display has labels for the 4 LED indicators. If desired, the
backlight colour can be changed to indicate the presence of an active alarm.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Powering Up Page 37


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

LED Functions
There are four red LEDs that by default, indicate the status of the primary and secondary
control outputs, automatic tuning and alarm status. The top line of the graphical display has
four labels for LED indicators. The function of these LEDs and their display labels can be
changed using the PC configuration software. The information in this manual assumes
standard functions for these LEDs.

Keypad
Each instrument has four keypad switches, which are used to navigate through the user
menus and adjust the parameter values. In configuration screens, a context sensitive
scrolling help text is displayed that guides the user about the function of the keys.

Table 3. Keypad button functions

Button Function
Moves backwards to the previous parameter or screen in the
current mode.
CAUTION: If editing a parameter, ensure that the current
(highlighted) parameter value is correct before pressing the key as
this action will update the instrument to the value displayed.

In menus and configuration choice screens, this key moves to the


next item on the list.
Editable values can be decreased by pressing this key. Holding the
key down speeds up the change.
In Trend view this key moves the Cursor Line back through the
stored data points
In menus and configuration choice screens, this key moves to the
previous item on the list.
Editable values can be increased by pressing this key. Holding the
key down speeds up the change.
In Trend view this key moves the Cursor Line forward through the
stored data points
Moves forwards to the next parameter or screen in the current
mode.
CAUTION: If editing a parameter, ensure that the current
(highlighted) parameter value is correct before pressing the key as
this action will update the instrument to the value displayed.

Pressing the  key while holding down the  key causes the
instrument to move up one menu level. From Operation Mode and
in most menus, this will result in entry to the Main Menu.
From sub-menus, it is necessary to carry out this sequence more
than once to reach the main menu.
CAUTION: If editing a parameter, ensure that the current
(highlighted) parameter value is correct before pressing the key as
this action will update the instrument to the value displayed.

Page 38 Powering Up 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

6 Messages and Error Indications


Start-up Errors
The following displays are shown when an error detected during the power-up self-test.

Option Module Problems


The “Option Slot n Error” display is shown when an error detected with the installed option
modules - where “n” is the slot number for the fault.
Replace the module in slot “n”. If this does not solve the problem, return the instrument for
servicing.

Configuration Problem
Warns if a problem has been detected with the instrument configuration. Check all settings
are correct before proceeding. If the problem persists, return the instrument for servicing.
CAUTION:
Correct the signal/wiring problem to continue normal operation. .

Input Problems

Sensor Break Detection


Whenever a problem is detected with the process variable or auxiliary input connections,
their displayed value is replaced with the word “OPEN”.
This may be the result of a failed sensor, a broken connection or an input circuit fault.
In this condition, the Control Outputs go to the pre-set power value (see Control
Configuration).
CAUTION:
Correct the signal/wiring problem to continue normal operation.

Un-Calibrated Input Detection


The instrument is fully calibrated during manufacture. If a fault occurs and the calibration
data becomes corrupted, the process input display is replaced with the word “ERROR”.
In this condition, the Control Outputs go to the pre-set power value (see Control
Configuration).
CAUTION:
Re-calibrate the input before continuing normal operation. If the problem persists,
return the instrument for servicing.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Messages and Error Indications Page 39


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

PV Over-range or Under-range Indication


If the measured process variable value is more than 5% above than the Scale Range Upper
Limit, its value is replace by the word “HIGH”.

If the measured process variable value is more than 5% below than the Scale Range Lower
Limit, its value is replace by the word “LOW”.

Auxiliary Input Over-range or Under-range Indication


If the auxiliary input (RSP) is more than 5% above than the Auxiliary Input Upper Limit, its
value is replace by the word “HIGH”.

If the auxiliary input (RSP) is more than 5% below than the Auxiliary Input Lower Limit, its
value is replace by the word “LOW”.

If you need to return your instrument for servicing, check the Service Information screen
(available from the main menu) or contact your supplier for.

USB Data Transfer Problems

Data Transfer Failure message


If the instrument cannot successfully write to the USB memory stick, the message “Data
Transfer Failure” will be displayed. Check that there is adequate disk space on the memory
stick, then retry.
If the instrument cannot successfully read data from the USB memory stick, the message
“Data Transfer Failure” will also appear. Check that this operation would not cause the
maximum number of profiles and/or segments to be exceeded, the retry.

Getting Help

First Level Support


If the errors persist or other problems are encountered, refer your supplier for first level
support. This includes help with configuration, tuning, servicing and replacement modules.

Second Level Support


If your supplier is unable to assist or cannot be contacted, check the Service Information
Page (in Configuration Mode) for details of whom to contact.

Third Level Support


If further assistance is required, contact the nearest company from those listed on the back
page of this manual.

Page 40 Messages and Error Indications 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

7 Configuration and Use


Operation Mode
This is the mode used during normal operation of the instrument. It can be accessed from the
Main Menu, and is the usual mode entered at power-up. The available displays are
dependent upon the features and options fitted and the way in which it has been configured.

WARNING:
DURING NORMAL USE, THE USER MUST NOT REMOVE THE CONTROLLER FROM ITS
HOUSING OR HAVE UNRESTRICTED ACCESS TO THE REAR TERMINALS, AS THIS WOULD
PROVIDE POTENTIAL CONTACT WITH HAZARDOUS LIVE PARTS.

CAUTION:
Set all Configuration parameters as required before starting normal operations. It is
the responsibility of the installing engineer to ensure that the configuration is safe
for the intended application.

Base, Trend & Profile Operating Screens


The Base screen is the usual screen displayed during operation. It provides “at a glance”
information about the process. The Profile Operating screen shows similar information when
using profiles. Trend View is a graphical representation of recent process conditions. Its
scale adjusts automatically for the best resolution for the visible data.
Note:

Trend data is not retained at power down or the Sample Interval is changed.

Example Base Operating Screen


LED Indicators
LED Function Labels
Process Variable Value
Engineering Units
Actual Setpoint Value
Secondary Power, Primary Power,
Memory remaining or Memory remaining or
-ve Deviation Bar Graph +ve Deviation Bar Graph

Example Trend View Screen


Active Alarm(s) Trend Upper Scale Value
Cursor Line
Process Variable Trend PV Value At Cursor Line

Setpoint Trend (dotted) Trend Lower Scale Value


Time Markers Sample Interval
(10 samples per marker) (or Time At Cursor Line)

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Configuration & Use Page 41


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Example Profile Operating Screen


LED Indicators
LED Function Labels
Process Value & Setpoint
Engineering Units
Profile Progress Graph
Segment Progress Profile Status
► Run, ▌▌ Held, ■ Stopped

Table 4. Operation Mode Screens

Operation Mode:
After 2 minutes without key activity, the most screens revert to the Base Operating Screen. Screens
marked  do not revert automatically. They remain displayed until the user navigates away.
Calibration Check Due  Shown if a Calibration Reminder is set and the due date has passed-
Warning if the feature is enabled in Control Configuration. Recorder version
only.
Shown at power up (and repeated once per day).
Press  to acknowledge and continue using the instrument.
Re-calibrate or disable the reminder to cancel the warning.
Base Operating Screen.  LED Labels = LED indicator functions. Defaults are HEAT, COOL,
Displayed is: TUNE & ALARM - can be altered with configuration software
LED Labels; PV value; PV value = The current Process Variable value.
SP value & Bar Graph
SP value = The current Setpoint value.
Bar Graph = Primary/Secondary Power; Deviation or Memory Use. -
see Bar Graph Format screen in Display Configuration.
Auto/Manual Control Allows switching between automatic and manual control modes.
Mode Selection – only shown if enabled in Control Configuration.
Setpoint Value Display View and alter local (internal) setpoint(s) to any value between the
& Adjustment Setpoint Upper and Lower Limits. Remote setpoints are read only.
Setpoint Ramp Rate Setpoint Ramp Rate adjustment between 0.1 and 9999.0 Display
Units per hour. - only shown if enabled in Control Configuration.
Select Setpoint Source Select if Local Setpoint 1 or the Alternate Setpoint is to be the active
setpoint. - only shown if enabled in Control Configuration.
Control Enable Enables or disables control outputs. When disabled, the unit works
normally except the Primary and Secondary Control Outputs are
turned off - only shown if enabled in Control Configuration.
Alarm Status Shows the status (Active, Inactive or Unused) of the five alarms.
Event Status Shows the status (Active or Inactive) of the five Events - Profiler
version only.
Profiler Operating  LED Labels = LED indicator functions. Defaults are HEAT, COOL,
Screen TUNE & ALARM - can be altered with configuration software
Displayed is: PV value = The current Process Variable value.
LED Labels; PV value; SP value = The current Setpoint value.
SP value; Bar Graph &
Status Indicator Bar Graph = The Profile Name & overall progress; the current
Segment Number and segment progress
Status Indicator = ► (Run), ▌▌ (Held), or ■ (Stopped).
- Profiler version only.

Page 42 Configuration & Use 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Operator Profile Control Allows the operator to control the defined profiles.
If a profile is running, the choices are: Do Nothing; Abort Profile (end
immediately); Jump to Next Segment; Hold Profile or Release Hold.
If no profile is running, the choices are: Do Nothing; Run Profile or
End Profile Control (returns to standard controller operation). - only
shown if enabled in the Profile Control Menu.
Profile Information Shows the Profile Status (Running, Held, Aborted or Ended); Profile
Time Remaining, Cumulative Held Time; Cycles Completed and
Profile Sequences Completed.
Segment Information Shows the Current segment number and type (Ramp Up, Ramp
Down, Dwell, or End); Segment Time Remaining, Loops completed if
loop-back active.
Start & Stop Data  Manually Stop or Start a new recording. – only shown if Recorder
Recording Log Trigger is Operator Start/Stop.
Recorder Status  The status of the data recorder. It shows if a recording is in progress;
Information the recording mode (FIFO or Record Until Memory Is Used); the
memory usage for each recording sample; memory remaining (in
bytes) and the approximate* recording time remaining.
*If the status of alarms is recorded, extra samples are taken when
these alarms change state. Therefore recording time will reduce.
Trend View  An auto-scaling trend graph of the Process Variable; Process
Variable & Setpoint (doted line), or the Minimum and Maximum value
of the Process Variable measured since the last sample. Any active
alarm(s) are indicated above the graph. The user can scroll the right
hand cursor line back to examine 240 data points. The sample
interval is set in Display Configuration.
Recorder Memory Full  Indicates that the Data Recorder memory is full and that recording
Warning has stopped – Only if Recording mode is Record Until Memory Full.
- Custom Display  The user can copy up to 50 Configuration Menu parameters into
Screens Operation Mode using the PC software.
Note: In this mode these screens are not pass-code protected.
Note:
The operator can freely use the screens in this mode. It is possible to make Operation
Mode “read only” from the Display Configuration sub-menu.

Navigating in Operator Mode


Press  to move forward or  to move backwards through the available screens.

When a displayed value can be adjusted, use  or  to change its value.

In Trend View, pressing  or  moves the Cursor Line back through the last 240
data points.

Adjusting the Local Setpoint(s)


Setpoints can be adjusted within the limits set by the Setpoint Upper and Lower Limit
parameters in Control Configuration. Operation Mode adjustment of Setpoint is not possible if
Read Only Operation Mode has been selected in the Display Configuration settings.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Configuration & Use Page 43


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Press  to select the Setpoint Value Display and Adjustment screen

Press  or to adjust each Local Setpoint to the required value.

A Remote Setpoint value cannot be altered from the key pad.

Adjusting the Setpoint Ramp Rate


The Setpoint Ramp Rate may be adjusted in the range 0.1 to 9999.0 (in display units per
hour) and OFF. When the Setpoint Ramp Rate is set to Off, setpoint changes will step
immediately to the new value.

Press  to select the Setpoint Ramp Rate screen

Press  or to adjust ramp rate to the required value.

Note:
The SETPOINT ramp feature disables the pre-tune facility. The self-tune facility will
calculate new tuning terms only after the SETPOINT has completed the ramp.

Selecting Automatic or Manual Mode


Depending on the Control Configuration settings, an Auto/Manual selection screen may be
shown which allows operators to select between automatic or manual control. Switching to or
from manual mode is made via Bumpless Transfer. In Manual mode the Setpoint display is
replaced by a 0 to 100% power output level, labelled “Man”.

Press  to select the Manual Power screen

Press  or to adjust required power to the required value.

Note:
In Manual mode a running profile will hold until automatic control is reselected.
CAUTION:
The Manual Mode power level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% (-100 to +100% for
dual control). It is not restricted by the Output Power Limit parameters.

Control Enable or Disable


Depending on the Control Configuration settings, a Control Enable/Disable screen may be
show. Disabling control turns of all control outputs (Primary and Secondary power output
levels are set to zero).

Press  to select the Control Enable screen

Press  or to change between control enable and disable.

CAUTION:
Use with care. The instrument is not able to control the process when control is
disabled. The Output Power Lower Limit parameters are also ignored.

Page 44 Configuration & Use 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Main Menu
This menu is used to access the various features and configuration menus available in the
instrument. The available menus are dependent upon the features and options fitted and the
way in which it has been configured

Entry into the Main Menu


Holding down and pressing from Operation Mode and most other screens will
cause the unit to enter the Main. Each time this key press sequence is made, the
instrument moves to the next menu level above. Sub-menu levels will require this
sequence to be pressed more than once in order to reach the main menu.

Navigating the Main Menu


Once in the Main Menu, press  or  to select the required option

Press  to enter the chosen menu.

Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.

Unlock Codes
To prevent unauthorised entry, most modes require a pass-code (1 to 9999) to gain entry.
These modes are indicated by the symbol  against their names. The default unlock code
for all modes is 10 and the current codes can be viewed and changed from the Lock Code
View in Configuration Mode. For security, users should to change the codes. If the
Configuration Mode lock code is lost, refer to the Lock code View section of this manual.

Table 5. Main Menu Screens

Main Menu:
Operation Mode Display of the process and setpoint values, selection/adjustment of
the Setpoints, auto/manual control, alarm/event status, trend view and
where available, data recorder and profile information.
Setup Wizard Easy, step-by-step parameter setup for simple applications.
Supervisor Mode If configured from the PC software, a sub-set of up to 50 Configuration
screens can be accessed.
Configuration Menu Accesses the sub-menus for Input; Control; Outputs; Alarms;
Communications; Recorder; Clock; Display; Lock Codes and Reset
To Defaults menus and functions.
Automatic Tuning Selection of Pre-Tune, Self-Tune and Auto Pre-Tune.
Profile Setup Menu Setting of Global Control Parameters for all profiles; Profile creation,
editing and deletion.
Profile Control Menu Selection of profiles. Running, holding or aborting of profiles.
USB Menu Uploading/downloading instrument configuration, profile information
and data recordings.
Recorder Menu Manually starting, stopping and deleting recordings.
Product Information Instrument information, including features and options installed.
Service Information Contact information for service/support etc.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Configuration & Use Page 45


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Setup Wizard
An easy Setup Wizard runs automatically at first ever power-up or if whenever a Reset To
Defaults is carried out. Users can follow the Wizard screens to setup parameters required for
typical applications (screens marked w in the Screen Sequence lists are included in the
Setup Wizard).
A partial Wizard also runs whenever option modules have been changed. The partial wizard,
only shows parameters affected by the changes made. The Wizard can also be run manually
from the Main Menu. Once completed, the Setup Wizard exits to Operation Mode.
Experts or users with more complex applications can select the parameters they wish to set-
up from the Configuration Menus instead of using the Wizard.

Manual entry to the Setup Wizard


CAUTION:
Adjustments to these parameters should only be performed by personnel
competent and authorised to do so.

The Setup Wizard can be selected from the Main Menu.

Hold down and press from to enter the Main Menu.

Press  or  to select Setup Wizard.

Press  to enter the Setup Wizard.

Note:
With the exception of the first ever power-up, entry into this mode is security-protected by the
Setup Wizard Lock Code. Refer to the Lock Code View section for more details.

Navigating in the Setup Wizard


Press  to move forward or  to move backwards through the screens.

Press  or  to change the value as required.

Hold down and press to return to the Main Menu

Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.

Table 6. Setup Wizard Screens

 Setup Wizard:
Setup Wizard Unlocking w Enter correct code number to access Setup Wizard.
- Screens marked w w Press  to select each major configuration parameter in turn. Follow
on-screen prompts to alter the values.
Setup Wizard w Confirms completion of the Setup Wizard. Exits to Operation Mode.
Completed

Page 46 Configuration & Use 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Supervisor Mode
This mode is only available if it has been configured from the PC software. The software is
used to copy up to 50 screens from the Configuration Menus to include in Supervisor Mode.
The purpose of Supervisor Mode is to allow certain users access to a lock code protected
sub-set of the main configuration parameters without providing them with the higher level
Configuration Menu unlock code.

Entry into Supervisor Mode


CAUTION:
Adjustments to these parameters should only be performed by personnel
competent and authorised to do so.

Supervisor Mode is entered from the Main Menu

Hold down and press from to enter the Main Menu.

Press  or  to select Supervisor Mode

Press  to enter the Supervisor Mode.

Note:
Entry into this mode is security-protected by the Supervisor Mode Lock Code. Refer to the
Lock Code View section for more details.

Navigating in Supervisor Mode


Press  to move forward or  to move backwards through the screens.

Press  or  to change the value as required.

Hold down and press to return to the Main Menu

Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.

Table 7. Supervisor Mode Screens

 Supervisor Mode:
Supervisor Mode If Supervisor Mode is configured, enter correct code number to
Unlocking continue.
- Supervisor Mode Press  to select each parameter in turn. Follow on-screen prompts
Screens … to alter the values.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Configuration & Use Page 47


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Configuration Menu
This menu can be used as an alternative to the more limited Setup Wizard when the
instrument is configured for the first time, or when further changes are required to the
instruments characteristics. Configuration contains a number of sub-menus that allow access
to all of the available parameters. The correct settings must be made before attempting to
use the instrument in an application.

Entry into the Configuration Menu


CAUTION:
Adjustments to these parameters should only be performed by personnel
competent and authorised to do so.

Configuration is entered from the Main Menu

Hold down and press from to enter the Main Menu.

Press  or  to select Configuration Menu

Press  to enter the Configuration Menu.

Note:
Entry into this mode is security-protected by the Configuration Menu Lock Code. Refer to
the Unlock Code section for more details.

Navigating the Configuration Menu


Configuration contains sub-menus to set-up the Input; Output; Control; Alarm;
Communications; Recorder; Display and Lock Codes. There is also an option to return the
instrument to its factory default settings.
The correct settings must be made before attempting to use the instrument in an application.

From the Configuration Menu, press  or  to select the required sub-menu.

Press  to enter the sub-menu.

Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.
Note:
Only parameters that are applicable to the hardware and options fitted will be displayed.
Table 8. Configuration Menu Screens

 Configuration Menu:
Configuration Mode Enter correct code number to access Configuration Mode.
Unlocking
Configuration Options Select required Configuration Sub-Menu Option from: Input; Control;
Output; Alarm; Communications; Recorder; Clock; Display; Lock Code
or Reset To Defaults.

Page 48 Configuration & Use 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Input Configuration Sub-Menu

Table 9. Input Configuration Sub-Menu Screens

Input Configuration:
Process Variable Input w From Thermocouple, RTD and Linear inputs. - see specifications
Type section for full details of input types available.
Engineering Units w Select display units from: °C; °F; °K; bar; %; %RH; pH; psi or none.
Decimal Point Position w Sets the maximum display resolution to 0; 1; 2 or 3 decimal places.
Temperature inputs are limited to 0 or 1 place. Numbers >99.999
never display more than 2 dec places, >999.99 never display more
than 1 dec place and >999.99 always display without decimal places.
Multi-Point Scaling Enables or disables Linear Input Multi-Point Scaling. This feature
Enable allows up to 15 point linearization of mA or V DC input signals.
Scale Range Lower w For Temperature inputs, Upper & Lower Limits set the usable span.
Limit Min = 100 units, max = range limits - see specs. For Linear inputs,
Multi-Point Scale Upper & Lower Limits define the values shown (-1999 to 9999) when
Point(s) input is at minimum and maximum values. Min span = 100 units. If
Multi-Point Scaling enabled, up to 15 breakpoints* can scale input vs.
Scale Range Upper w displayed value between the linear input scale limits.
Limit *A breakpoint set at 100% input ends the sequence.
CJC Enable/Disable Enables/disables internal Thermocouple Cold Junction
Compensation. The default value is Enabled.
Process Variable Offset Trims the process value. +Ve values add to, –Ve values subtract
from measured input. Caution: A value other than zero alters the
apparent calibration of the instrument. Use with care!
Input Filter Time Removes unwanted signal noise. Adjustable from 0.0 to 100.0
seconds or OFF (default = 2s). Caution: Too large a value will cause
slow response to changes in the process. Use with care!
Auxiliary Input n Type w Sets the type of signal to be connected to the auxiliary inputs (if
fitted). From: 0-10V; 2-10V; 0-5V; 1-5V, 0-20mA or 4-20mA DC.
Auxiliary input B also supports >2K Potentiometer and 0-100mV.
Auxiliary Input n Scaling w Scales the displayed a value (-9999 to 10000) when an auxiliary
Lower Limit input is at or below it’s lower limit (e.g. 4mA for a 4-20mA signal).
Auxiliary Input n Scaling w Scales the displayed a value (-9999 to 10000) when an auxiliary
Upper Limit input is at or above it’s lower limit (e.g. 20mA for a 4-20mA signal).
Auxiliary Input n Offset Trims the displayed a value for auxiliary input A or B. +Ve values are
added to, –Ve values subtracted from the measured auxiliary input.
Calibration Reminder Enables or disables the display of Calibration Reminder at start-up
Enable/Disable (repeated daily thereafter), if the due date has passed – Available on
the Recorder version only
Calibration Reminder Sets the due date for the Calibration Reminder - Available on the
Due Date Recorder version only

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Configuration & Use Page 49


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Control Configuration Sub-Menu

Table 10. Control Configuration Sub-Menu Screens

Control Configuration:
Control Enable/Disable Sets the method to enable/disable the control output(s). From:
Enabled (always); Disabled (always); Enable/Disable via Digital Input
A or B, or Operator Selectable (allows control output(s) to be turned
off from Operation Mode). Caution: The instrument is not able to
control the process when control is disabled. The Output Power
Lower Limit parameters are also ignored. Use with care!
Auto/Manual Mode w Sets the method to select Automatic or Manual Control. From:
Access Automatic (always); Manual (always); Select via Digital Input A or B,
or Operator Selectable (allows automatic or manual control to be
selected from Operation Mode). Caution: In Manual Mode, the user
must alter power to control the process correctly (0 to 100% or -100
to +100% for dual control). Manual power is not restricted by the
Output Power Limit parameters. Use with care!
Control Type w Set to Single Control for Primary control only (e.g. Heating or Cooling
only) or to Dual for Primary and Secondary Control outputs (e.g.
Heating & Cooling).
Primary Control Action w Set the Primary Control Output for Reverse or Direct Action. Reverse
action applies more primary power as the process falls further below
setpoint (e.g. heating applications). Direct action applies more
primary power as the process rises further above setpoint (e.g.
cooling applications).
Secondary output action is always opposite to Primary action.
Control Status Displays the current Process Variable and Setpoint values to aid
manual tuning – This screen is Read Only.
Power Output Level Displays the current Primary and Secondary control power levels
(each 0 to 100%) to aid manual tuning – This screen is Read Only.
Primary Proportional Sets the width of the Primary Proportional Band between 0.5% and
Band 999.9%, or select On-Off control. – This screen is Read Only during
automatic tuning.
Secondary Proportional Sets the width of the Secondary Proportional Band between 0.5%
Band and 999.9%, or select On-Off control. – This screen is Read Only
during automatic tuning.
Integral Time Constant Sets the Integral Time Constant (Automatic Reset) from 1s to 99min
59s or OFF. – This screen is Read Only during automatic tuning.
Derivative Time Derivative Time Constant (Rate) from 1s to 99 min 59s or OFF. –
Constant This screen is Read Only during automatic tuning.
Manual Reset (Bias) Sets the Manual Reset (Proportional Band Bias) from 0-100%
or -100 to +100% for Dual Control.
Overlap / Deadband Sets the Overlap (+ve values) or Deadband (-ve values) between
Primary & Secondary Proportional Bands when Dual Control is used.
Primary On-Off Sets the Primary On-Off control hysteresis (deadband) from 0.1 to
Differential 10.0% of Span (centred about setpoint), when Primary On-Off control
is used.

Page 50 Configuration & Use 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Secondary On-Off Sets the Secondary On-Off control hysteresis (deadband) from 0.1 to
Differential 10.0% of Span (centred about setpoint), when Primary PID with
Secondary On-Off control is used.
Primary & Secondary Sets the combined Primary & Secondary On-Off Control hysteresis
On-Off Differential (deadband) from 0.1 to 10.0% of Span. when Primary On-Off control
and Secondary On-Off control is used.
Primary Cycle Time Sets the Primary Power Cycle Time (0.5s to 512s). For Primary
Relay, SSR Driver or Triac Control Outputs only.
Secondary Cycle Time Sets the Secondary Power Cycle Time (0.5s to 512s). For Secondary
Relay, SSR Driver or Triac Control Outputs only.
Primary Power Upper Sets the Maximum Primary Output Power Limit, from 0 to 100% of
Limit available power. This value must be higher than the lower limit.
Caution: The instrument will not be able to control the process if
sufficient power isn’t available to maintain setpoint. Use with care!
Primary Power Lower Minimum Primary Output Power limit, from 0 to 100%. This value
Limit must be less than the upper limit. Caution: The instrument will not
be able to control the process if the lower limit is more than required
to maintain setpoint. Use with care!
Secondary Power Upper Maximum Secondary Output Power limit, from 0 to 100%. This value
Limit must be higher than the lower limit. Caution: The instrument will not
be able to control the process if sufficient power isn’t available to
maintain setpoint. Use with care!
Secondary Power Lower Minimum Secondary Output Power limit, from 0 to 100%. This value
Limit must be less than the upper limit. Caution: The instrument will not
be able to control the process if the lower limit is more than required
to maintain setpoint. Use with care!
Sensor Break Pre-set Sets the power level applied if the process input (or active RSP) is
Power Output lost. Adjustable from 0 to 100% or -100 to +100% for Dual Control.
The default value is OFF (0% power). Caution: Use a value that will
maintain safe conditions.
Setpoint Selection w Sets the method to select the Active Setpoint. From: Local
Setpoint 1 only; Alternate Setpoint only; Select via Digital Input A or
B; or Operator Selectable (allows Setpoint 1 or Alternate Setpoint to
be selected from Operation Mode).
Alternate Setpoint w Up to two setpoints can be used, Local Setpoint 1 plus an Alternate
Source The Alternate Setpoint can be selected from: Local Setpoint 2 or a
Remote Setpoint set via Auxiliary Input A or B.
Setpoint Upper Limit The maximum allowable setpoint value. Adjustable within the Input
Span limits, but must be greater than the Setpoint Lower Limit.
Applies to both local and remote setpoints. Caution: Operators can
adjust the setpoint to any value between the Setpoint Upper and
Lower Limits. Use with care!
Setpoint Lower Limit The minimum allowable setpoint value. Adjustable within the Input
Span limits, but must be less than the Setpoint Upper Limit. Applies
to both local and remote setpoints. Caution: Operators can adjust
the setpoint to any value between the Setpoint Upper and Lower
Limits. Use with care!
Setpoint Ramp Editing Enables or disables the changing of the Setpoint Ramp Rate in
Operation Mode – Note: this does not turn off an active ramp. To
turn of an active ramp, set the Setpoint Ramp Rate to OFF.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Configuration & Use Page 51


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Setpoint Ramp Rate The Setpoint Ramp Rate value (1 to 9999 display units per hour or
OFF). This ramp is applied at power-up and any setpoint changes.
Local Setpoint 1 Value w Sets the value of Local Setpoint 1 between the Setpoint Upper and
Lower Limits.
Local Setpoint 1 Offset A value added to the Setpoint 1 value (+ve values) or subtracted
from it (-ve values). Use when the instrument is a slave in multi-zone
applications to achieve a zone offset. Otherwise, always set to zero.
Local Setpoint 2 Value w Sets the value of Local Setpoint 1 between the Setpoint Upper and
Lower Limits.
Local Setpoint 2 Offset A value added to the Setpoint 2 value (+ve values) or subtracted
from it (-ve values). Use when the instrument is a slave in multi-zone
applications to achieve a zone offset. Otherwise, always set to zero.

Output Configuration Sub-Menu

Table 11. Output Configuration Sub-Menu Screens

Outputs Configuration:
No Outputs Warning Shown if the Outputs Configuration menu is entered on an
instrument without any output modules fitted.
Linear Output n Type w Set the desired type for any Linear Outputs fitted. From: 0-5, 0-10,
1-5, 2-10V & 0-20, 4-20mA or 0-10VDC adjustable Transmitter PSU.
Adjustable 0-10V w Sets the voltage required if Linear Output n type is 0-10VDC
Transmitter PSU n adjustable Transmitter PSU.
Output n Usage w Sets the use for each output fitted. From: Primary or Secondary
Control; Alarms; Profile Events & Alarms; Retransmit Process
Variable or Setpoint. Choices offered are as appropriate for the
output type fitted (e.g. only Linear Outputs can retransmit).
Output n Alarm w When an Output Usage is Alarms, this selects which alarm(s) will
Selection cause it to change state. From Alarm 1; 2; 3; 4; 5 or a Logical OR of
alarms 1 to 2; 1 to 3; 1 to 4 or 1 to 5. Each choice is selectable with
Direct Action (on during alarm) or Reverse Action (off during alarm).
Output n Events w When and Output Usage is Events & Alarms, this selects which
Events(s) will cause it to change state. From: Profile Running or
Profile End; Event 1; 2; 3; 4; 5 or a Logical AND of Event n & Alarm
n. Each choice is selectable with Direct Action (on during event) or
Reverse Action (off during event). - Profiler version only
Retransmit Output n w Sets the displayed value at which a retransmission output should be
Scale Low at it’s minimum level (e.g. the display value when a 4 to 20mA PV
Retransmission output will be 4mA. Adjustable from -1999 to 9999.
Retransmit Output n w Sets the displayed value at which a retransmission output will be at
Scale High it’s maximum level (e.g. the display value when a 4 to 20mA PV
Retransmission output will be 20mA. Adjustable from -1999 to 9999.

Page 52 Configuration & Use 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Alarm Configuration Sub-Menu

Table 12. Alarm Configuration Sub-Menu Screens

Alarm Configuration:
Alarm n Type w Sets the type for each of the 5 alarms From: Unused; Process High;
Process Low; PV-SP Deviation; Band; Control Loop; Rate Of Signal
Change; PV Signal Break; Aux. Input A or B Break.
Alarm n Value w Alarm activation point. – applicable if type is High; Low; Deviation
(+ve above, -ve below SP), Band (above or below SP) or Rate of
Signal Change (a rate of more that x units per hour).
Process Alarm n Deadband on “safe” side of alarm, through which signal must pass
Hysteresis before alarm deactivates.
Signal Change Alarm n The minimum time that the rate of input change must be above the
Minimum Duration alarm threshold for a Rate Of Change Alarm to change state (from on
to off, or off to on). Adjustable from 1 to 9999 secs. Caution: If the
duration is less than this time, the alarm will not activate no matter
how fast the rate of rise.
Alarm n Inhibit Enables or disables the prevention of initial alarm activation, if the
alarm condition is true at power up. Activation only occurs once the
alarm condition has passed and then reoccurred.
Loop Alarm Type Sets the source of the Loop Alarm Time. From: Automatic (2x the
Integral Time Constant) or Manual (the Manual Loop Alarm Time
value). If configured, a Loop Alarm activates if no response is seen
after this time.
Manual Loop Alarm The time allowed (after PID power output reaches minimum or
Time maximum), for process to begin responding.

Communications Configuration Sub-Menu

Table 13. Communications Configuration Sub-Menu Screens

Communications Configuration:
No Communications If Communications Configuration menu is entered without a
Warning communications module fitted.
Modbus RTU Parity w From: Odd; Even or None.
Modbus RTU Data Rate w From: 9600; 19200; 57600 or 115200 bps.
Master Mode, or Slave w Slave address (1 to 255), or multi-zone Setpoint Master Mode.
Address
Target Register In Slave Target register for Setpoint value in attached slave controllers.
Master Mode Format The data format required by the attached setpoint slaves. From:
Integer; integer with 1 decimal place or float.
Serial Communications Enables/disables writing via RS485 or Ethernet (if fitted). When
Write Enable disabled, all parameters are read only.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Configuration & Use Page 53


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Recorder Configuration Sub-Menu

Table 14. Data Recorder Configuration Sub-Menu Screens

Recorder Configuration:
No Recorder Warning If the Recorder Configuration menu is entered on an instrument
without this option fitted.
Recording In Progress If recording in progress when Recorder Configuration entered. –
Warning Allows access to the Recording Start/Stop screen only, until the
recording is stopped.
Recorder Mode w Choose Record Until Memory Used (Stop recording when full) or
Continuous FIFO (First In - First Out) - Caution: A FIFO recording
will overwrite all previous recordings in memory, starting with the
oldest data first. Download the previous data to USB memory stick
before selecting this option.
Recording Sample w A recording of the selected data will be taken once every Sample
Interval Interval. From: Every 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 Seconds, or Every 1; 2; 5;
10; 15; 30 Minutes. Note: Short intervals will reduce the maximum
duration of the recording.
Recorder Trigger w The recording Start/Stop trigger method to be used. From: Operation
Mode selection; Recorder Menu selection; On Alarm(s); Digital Input
A or B state; or During Profiles.
Trigger On Alarms Any from: Alarm n – Where n is alarms 1 to 5. Any combination of
these can be set to trigger (TRG) or not (OFF). Any active alarm set
to TRG will start the instrument recording. Note: Recording will only
stop if all alarms selected as triggers are inactive.
Values To Record Any from: Process Variable value; Maximum or Minimum PV (since
the previous sample was taken); Setpoint; Primary Power or
Secondary Power. Any combination of these can be set to Record
(REC) or not (OFF). Note: Recording more parameters will reduce
the maximum duration of the recording.
Events To Record Any from: Alarm n Status or Unit turned On/Off. Caution: An alarm
state change between samples is also recorded. This uses additional
recorder memory, which may cause the recording to end sooner than
expected.
Profiler Events To Any from: Profiler Event n Status. Caution: A profile event state
Record change between samples is also recorded. This uses additional
recorder memory, which may cause the recording to end sooner than
expected.
Recorder Status Shows if a recording is in progress; the recording mode; memory
Information usage per sample; memory remaining and the recording time
remaining. The time remaining is adjusted for any alarm/events that
have already occurred, but does allow for future alarms/events

Page 54 Configuration & Use 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Clock Configuration Sub-Menu

Table 15. Internal Clock Configuration Sub-Menu Screens

Clock Configuration:
Date Format w Sets the format used for all displayed dates: dd/mm/yyyy (Day /
Month / Year) or mm/dd/yyyy (Month / Day / Year). – Recorder
versions only.
Set Date w Sets the internal clock Date. – Entered in the format defined by Date
Format screen. – Recorder versions only.
Set Day Of Week Sets the day of week used by the internal clock. – Recorder versions
only.
Set Time Sets the internal clock Time. - In hh:mm:ss (Hours : Minutes :
Seconds) format. – Recorder versions only.

Display Configuration Sub-Menu

Table 16. Display Configuration Sub-Menu Screens

Display Configuration:
Enable Custom Display Enables/disables Custom Operation Mode, if configured (requires PC
Mode configuration software).
Read Only Operation Allows Operation Mode to be Read-Only or Read/Write. Screens can
Mode? be seen but values cannot be changed if set to Read-Only.
Operation Mode Bar From: PID Power; Control Deviation or % Recorder Memory Usage.
Graph Format
Trend Sample Interval Interval between display of next value on the trend graph From: Every
1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 Seconds, or Every 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 Minutes.
Select Trend Mode From: PV only, PV (solid) & SP (dotted) at sample time or Max/Min
PV between samples (candle-stick graph). Alarm activity is always
shown.
Display Colour From: Red only; Green only; Red to Green on Alarm or Green to Red
on Alarm.
Invert Display Standard or Negative display image.
Display Contrast Screen contrast (0 and 100) to improve clarity. 100 = maximum
contrast.
Language Select the main or the alternate local language. The main language is
selected at time of order. The choice of alternate language can be
changed using the PC software.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Configuration & Use Page 55


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Lock Code View

Unlock Codes
To prevent unauthorised entry, some menus are protected by a lock code. These screens
are indicated by the  symbol before their names in the screen list tables. To enter these
screens, the correct code must first be entered. The current lock codes can be viewed and
changed from the Lock Code View Configuration sub-menu.

The default unlock code for all protected menus is 10. For security, users are recommended
to change these codes. A value between 1 and 9999 can be used, or the lock can be set to
OFF if no protection is required.

Navigating Lock Code View


Press  to move forward or  to move backwards through the screens.

Press  or  to change the value as required.

Hold down and press to return to the Main Menu

Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.

Table 17. Lock Code View Sub-Menu Screens

Lock Code View:


Lock Code View 1 Setup Wizard; Configuration Mode and Tuning Menu Lock Codes (1-
9999 or OFF).
Lock Code View 2 Supervisor Mode; USB; Recorder and Profiler Menu Lock Codes (1-
9999 or OFF) - if fitted/configured.

Lost Lock Codes


The lock codes can be viewed or changed from Configuration Mode. In the event that the
Configuration Mode lock code itself is forgotten, the instrument can be forced into Lock Code
View from power-up, where the codes can be checked and set to new values.

Forcing Lock Code View


Power down the instrument.

Re apply the power and hold down and for more than 5 seconds as the start-up
splash screen appears. Lock Code View should appear.

Press  to move forward or  to move backwards through the screens.

Make note of the codes or press  or  to change their values if required.

Hold down and press to return to the Main Menu

Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.

Page 56 Configuration & Use 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Resetting To Defaults

Table 18. Reset To Defaults Sub-Menu Screen

Reset To Defaults:
Reset To Defaults Sets all parameters to their factory default values.

If the instrument is to be used in a new or changed application, it is possible to reset all of the
instruments parameters back to their factory default settings. The Easy Setup Wizard runs
automatically whenever a Reset To Defaults is performed.
CAUTION:
User must reconfigure all required settings before using the instrument in a live
application.

Automatic Tuning Menu


The Automatic Tune Menu is used engage the Pre-tune and Self-tune facilities to assist the
user in setting up Proportional band(s), Integral and Derivative parameter values.
Pre-tune can be used to set PID parameters approximately. Self-tune may then be used to
optimise the tuning if required.
Pre-tune can be set to run automatically after every power-up by enabling Auto Pre-Tune.
The TUNE indicator (LED 3)* will flash while pre-tune is operating, and is continuously on
whilst Self-tune is operating. If both Pre-tune and Self-tune are engaged the AT indicator will
flash until Pre-tune is finished, and is then continuously on.
Note:
Self-Tune will not engage if either primary or secondary control outputs are set for On-Off
control.
Pre-Tune will not engage if either primary or secondary control outputs are set for On-Off
control, during setpoint ramping, if a profile is running or if the process variable is less than
5% of the input span from the setpoint.

Navigating Automatic Tuning Menu


Press  to move forward or  to move backwards through selections.

Press  or  to engage or disengage the tuning as required.

Hold down and press to return to the Main Menu

Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.
*Provided the function of LED3 has not been changed.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Configuration & Use Page 57


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Table 19. Automatic Tuning Menus Screens

 Automatic Tuning Menu:


Automatic Tuning Mode Enter correct code number to access Automatic Tuning Menu.
Unlocking
Pre-Tune w Turns Pre-Tune on/off. Pre-Tune is disabled in On-Off Control Mode;
if the PV is less than 5% of span from SP; during Profiles or if the
Setpoint is Ramping.
Pre-Tune Status Shows current Pre-Tune status. Active or Inactive.
Self-Tune Turns Self-Tune on/off. Self-Tune is disabled in On-Off Control
Mode.
Self-Tune Status Shows current Self-Tune status. Active or Inactive.
Auto Pre-Tune Enable Enables/Disables Automatic Pre-Tune attempt at power-up. Normal
Pre-Tune engagement rules are applied (see above).

Profiler Setup Menu


Refer to the Profiler Option section for more details on the use of the profiler and it’s features.

Table 20. Profiler Setup Menu Screens

 Profiler Menu:
General Profile Configuration: Settings that apply to all profiles
Profile Run/Hold Selects the method used to Run or Hold a profile. From: Digital Input
Signal A; Digital Input B or Key Pad Only (using the Profile Control Menu or
an Operation Mode screen).
Profile Abort Selects the method used to force a profile to end immediately. From:
General

Signal Digital Input A; Digital Input B or Key Pad Only (using the Profile
Control Menu or an Operation Mode screen).
Control In Enables/disables the ability to control profiles (run, hold or abort)
Operation Mode from Operation Mode.
Enable Edit While Enables/disables the ability to edit profiles whist a profile is running
Running (even if selected, the current or next segment of the running profile
will not change until after profile is restarted).
Create A Profile  Creates a new profile. A header is created first, followed by the
segments – see below. A warning is displayed if the maximum
number of 64 profiles or 255 segments is exceeded.
Profile Header: Settings that apply to the chosen profile as a whole
Profile Header Details

Enter Profile Name  Up to 16 characters can be used to name each profile


Profile Starting  The setpoint value to be used at the beginning of the first segment.
Point From: Actual Setpoint or Process Variable value at the time the
profile starts.
Profile Start  From: None (profile start is not delayed); After Delay or Day and
Trigger Time (Recorder version only).
Profile Start Time  The time (hh:mm:ss) when the profile should run. – This applies only
if Day and Time is the Profile Start Trigger. Caution: Take care not
to clash with other profiles. Profile cannot start if another is running.

Page 58 Configuration & Use 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Profile Start Day(s)  The Day(s) when the profile should run. From: Mon; Tue; Wed; Thu;
Fri; Sat; Sun; Mon-Fri; Mon-Sat; Sat-Sun or All. – This applies only if
Day and Time is the Trigger.

Profile Start Delay  The delay time, up to 99:59 (hh:mm), for a profile to begin after the
start request has been given.
Profile Recovery  The power-on action if profile was running at power-down (e.g. after
Profile Header Details

Method a power cut), or following correction of a signal break. From: Control


outputs off; Restart profile; Maintain last profile setpoint; Use
controller setpoint; Continue profile from where it was when power
(cont…)

failed.
Profile Recovery  The Recovery Method is ignored (the profile continues from where
Time power failed), if power off for less than this time. Max 99:59
(hh:mm). - Recorder version only.
Profile Abort  Action after profile is forced to stop before its end. From: Control
Action outputs off; Maintain last profile setpoint or Use controller setpoint.
Profile Cycles  The number of times the program should run each time it is started
(1-9999 or Infinite).
Profile Segments: Settings that apply individual profile segments
Segment Number  Shows the number of the profile segment being created from 1-255
Segment Type  Set the segment type from: Ramp Time (time to reach target SP);
Ramp Rate (rate of change towards target SP); Step (jump to target
SP), Dwell (keep current SP); Hold (hold the profile until released);
Loop (back to previous segment); Join (join to another profile); End
(end the profile) or Repeat Sequence Then End (repeat a sequence
of joined profiles – of which this is the last). A Join, End or Repeat
Sequence Then End will become the last segment in the profile.
Segment Target  The setpoint value to be reached by the end of this segment, if the
Setpoint segment type is Ramp Time, Ramp Rate or Step.
Profile Segment Details

Segment Ramp  The time (hh:mm:ss) to reach the Segment Target Setpoint if the
Time segment type is Ramp Time.
Segment Ramp  The rate of change towards the Segment Target Setpoint if the
Rate segment type is Ramp Rate. The rate can be set from 0.001 to
9999.9 display units per hour.
Segment Dwell  The time (hh:mm:ss) to maintain the current setpoint if the segment
Time type is Dwell.
Segment Loop  Enter the segment to loop back to, and the number of times to loop
back, before continuing forward to the next segment if the segment
type is Loop. Note: Two Loops cannot be set to cross each other.
Segment Auto-  From: None (no auto-hold); Above Setpoint (hold if too high only);
Hold Type Below Setpoint (hold if too low only) or Band (hold if too high or low).
Segment Auto- The distance from setpoint beyond which the profile is held for the
Hold Band Value selected Auto-Hold Type. The profile continues once the process
returns within this band.
Segment Hold Sets the method used to release the profile from hold if the segment
Release Type type is Hold. From: Digital Input A; Digital Input B; Front Keys or
Time Of Day. (Time of day on Recorder version only )

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Configuration & Use Page 59


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Hold Release Time The time of day (hh:mm:ss) when a Hold Segment will release if the
Release Type is Time Of Day. Release occurs at the next
occurrence of this time.
Times To Repeat The number of times the entire sequence of profiles should run. – if
Sequence the last segment is Repeat Sequence Then End.

Segment End Type  The action taken after the profile ends normally. From: Control
Segment Details

outputs off; Maintain last profile setpoint; Use controller setpoint.


Select Profile To  Choose a profile to join to from the list provided – if the last
(Cont….)

Join segment type is Join. The selected profile will start immediately the
current profile ends.
Segment Events  Select the event(s) to be active during this segment. For end
segments, events selected to be active stay on until the unit exits
from profiler mode or a new profile runs.
Edit A Profile Header  Choose the profile to be edited from the list of names is provided,
then alter any values as required – The profile header details are as
shown in “Create A Profile” above.
Edit A Profile Segment  Choose the profile, then the segment to be edited from the lists
provided. Alter any values as required – The profile segment details
are as shown in “Create A Profile” above. Note: The last segment
type can only be set to Join, End or Repeat Sequence Then End.
 Choose the profile, then the new segment’s position from the lists
provided – Enter the new segments values as required – The profile
Insert A Segment segment details are as shown in “Create A Profile” above. Note: The
new segments type cannot be set to Join, End or Repeat Sequence
Then End.
Delete A Segment  Choose the profile, then the segment to be deleted from the lists
provided. End, Join or Repeat segments cannot be deleted.
Delete A Profile  Choose the profile to be deleted from the list of names is provided.
The user is then prompted confirm that it should be deleted.
Delete All Profiles  Deletes all profiles from memory. The user is prompted to confirm
that all profiles should be deleted. Caution: Use with care!

Profiler Control Menu

Table 21. Profiler Control Menu Screens

 Profiler Menu:
Profile Control If a profile is running, choose from: Do Nothing, Abort Profile (end
immediately); or Jump to Next Profile Segment, Hold Profile or
Release Hold.
If no profile running, choose from: Do Nothing, Run Profile or End
Profile Control (Return to normal controller operation).
Select Profile To Run Choose the profile to run from the list of names is provided. The
profile name and run status is then confirmed.

Page 60 Configuration & Use 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

USB Menu
A Notification is shown if a USB Memory Stick is inserted or removed from the USB Port. The
USB Menu will automatically be offered after insertion. The USB menu can also be accessed
from the Main Menu. Refer to the USB Interface section for more details on the use of the
USB port option.

Table 22. USB Menu Screens

 USB Menu:
USB Mode Unlocking Enter correct code number to access USB Menu.
Read/Write To USB Select the required action from: Read Instrument Configuration
Device? (from USB stick); Write Instrument Configuration (to USB stick);
Read Profiles (from USB stick); Write Profiles (to USB stick) or Write
Recorder Log File (to USB stick).
Select Profile To If writing a profile to the USB Memory Stick, choose a profile to write
Write from the list provided.
Enter A File or Enter an 8-character folder name for recorder logs, or a file name
Folder Name for configurations or profiles. An extension (bct for configurations,
.pfl for profiles) is added to files automatically. Caution: Existing
files/folders with the same name will be over-written.
Write

Writing An animated screen is shown while the file(s) are being written.
Profile/Configuration Caution: Do not disconnect USB device until completed! Data loss
File or corruption may result.
Transfer Successful Confirmation that the data transfer to the USB stick completed
correctly. Press  to continue
Transfer Failure For write failures, check for adequate disk space on the USB stick.
Select File Select the Configuration or Profile file to transfer from the USB stick.
Caution: A configuration read overwrites all existing instrument
settings.
Reading An animated screen is shown while the file is being read.
Profile/Configuration Caution: Do not remove the memory stick whist this operation is in
Read

File progress. Data corruption may result.


Transfer Successful Confirmation that the data transfer from the USB stick completed
correctly. Press  to continue
Transfer Failure For read failures, check the maximum number of profiles and/or
segments is not being exceeded.

CAUTION:
Do not remove the memory stick from the USB port whilst a Data Transfer to/from
the USB stick is in progress. Data loss or corruption may result.
CAUTION:
During Data Transfer, normal operation carries on in the background, but operator
access to other screens is not possible. Transfer of full memory can take up to 12
minutes. Only begin a transfer when you are certain that access (e.g. setpoint
changes) will not be required.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Configuration & Use Page 61


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Recorder Menu
This menu controls the starting and stopping of the Data Recorder and the deletion of
previous recordings. Refer to the Recorder Configuration sub-menu in Configuration Mode
for information about how to setup the data to be recorded and the recording interval.
See to the Data Recorder Option section for more details on the use of the recorder and it’s
features.

Table 23. Recorder Menu Screens

 Recorder Menu:
Recorder Mode Enter correct code number to access Data Recorder Menu.
Unlocking
Recording In Progress Shown if a recording is in progress when Recorder Menu entered. -
Warning Allows access to the Recording Start/Stop screen only, until the
recording is stopped.
Start/Stop Data Manually Stop, or Start a new recording. – if Log Trigger is Recorder
Recording Menu Start/Stop.
Abort Recording Forces a recording to Stop, overriding the selected record trigger. – if
Log Trigger is During Alarms; Digital Input A or B; or During Profile.
Recorder Status Shows if a recording is in progress; the recording mode; memory
Information usage per sample; memory remaining and the recording time
remaining. The time remaining is adjusted for any alarm/events that
have already occurred, but does allow for future alarms/events
Delete Recording Clears the recorder memory. Caution: Permanently removes All
recorded data.

Product Information Mode


This is a read only mode describing the instrument and the options fitted to it.

Navigating Product Information Mode


Press  to move forward or  to move backwards through the displayed
information.

Hold down and press to return to the Main Menu

Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.

Page 62 Configuration & Use 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Table 24. Product Information Screens

Product Information Mode:


Input Calibration Status Calibration status of mVDC, VDC, mADC, RTD and Thermocouple
CJC inputs. Caution: Re-calibrate the unit if any inputs are not shown
as “Calibrated”.
Calibration Check Due The date re-calibration is due. – if the Calibration Reminder is enabled
Date in the Input Configuration menu.
Option Slot n The type of Option Modules (if any) fitted in Option Slot s 1 to 4 and A
Information to C.
Controller Feature Controller Only; USB Port; Data Recorder (includes USB Port) or
Information Profiler.
Firmware Information The type and version of firmware installed in the instrument.
Serial Number The instruments serial number.
Date of Manufacture Date of Manufacture

Service Information Mode


This is a read only mode. It provides contact information to the user about where they can
obtain service, sales or technical support for the product. Normally this shows either the
manufacturer or supplier details. Using the PC software, the user can enter their own details.
There are 7 lines of text - each up to 26 characters.

Navigating Product Information Mode


There are no further screens in this mode.

Hold down and press to return to the Main Menu

Table 25. Service Contact Information Screen

Service Information Mode:


For Service Contact Contact information for Service, Sales or Technical Support.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Configuration & Use Page 63


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

8 The USB Interface


The features covered in this section of the manual are available on models fitted with the
optional USB Interface and the Data Recorder version, which includes the USB Interface.

Using the USB Port


The USB Interface option allows the user to upload or download instrument settings to or
from a USB memory stick. This allows easy configuration of multiple instruments or the
transfer to or from the PC configuration software. If the Data Recorder or Profiler options are
fitted, recordings and profile information can also be transferred via USB memory stick. Refer
to the USB Menu section for more details.

USB Memory Stick Folders & Files


When a USB stick is inserted, the instrument looks for, and if necessary creates the DEVICE,
CONFIG, PROFILE and RECORDER folders. Files must be located in these folders in order
to be used. When preparing to upload files from your PC, ensure that you save them to the
correct folder on the memory stick.

DEVICE – This folder must be located in the


Root of the USB memory stick
CONFIG – Configuration files (*.bct)
PROFILE – Profile program files (*.pfl)
RECORDER – Recorder log folders/files The
user is asked for a new recorder sub-folder
name before transferring recorder data to USB.
The log files (*.csv) are placed in this folder.

CAUTION:
If the file or folder named already exists, data will be overwritten

The first recorder log file written is named 000001-1.csv and placed in the new Recorder
sub-folder. Stopping/starting a recording does not create a new file, but each time the
parameters being recorded are changed a new file is created (e.g. 000002-1.csv then
000003-1.csv etc). If any of these files would exceed 65500 data lines, a new file is created
with the last digit incremented by 1 (e.g. 000001-2.csv then 000001-3.csv).
Note:
To speed up the disk operation, keep the number of files stored in these folders to a
minimum.
CAUTION:
Do not remove the memory stick from the USB port whilst a data transfer operation
is in progress. Data loss or corruption may result.

Page 64 Manual Tuning 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

9 The Data Recorder Option


The features covered in this section are available on models fitted with the Data Recorder
option. This option includes a USB Interface (refer to section 8) and a battery backed-up
Real Time Clock (RTC).

Introduction
The Data Recorder option allows the user to make a record their process over time.
Recordings can be transferred to a memory stick using the USB Port or downloaded using
one of the serial communications options?????.
Recordings are stored in Comma Separated format (.csv), suitable for use with
spreadsheets, or for import in to other software. See the USB Memory Stick Folders & Files
details (in section 8) for file information.
A Recorder option is added to the Configuration Menu and recorder control can be optionally
added to the Main Menu or Operation Mode. The RTC also expands the profiling capabilities
(refer to section 10) and allows a “calibration due” reminder to be shown at a date specified
by the user.

Changes To Operation Mode


The Data Recorder adds the option for a Calibration Reminder and a % memory use bar
graph to the Operation Mode screen sequence.

Calibration Reminder
A "calibration due reminder" can be shown if the date is equal to or after the Calibration
Reminder Date. The reminder screen persists until the key is pressed. If due, the reminder
is shown at Power-up, and repeated every 24hrs until the reminder date is changed.
The Calibration Reminder enable/disable and Reminder Date parameters are set in the Input
Configuration Menu.

Memory Use Bar Graph


The bar graph shown in the main Operation Mode screen has the option to show memory
used in place of the standard PID power or control deviation options. This graph shows the
0-100% memory used. The Bar Graph Format is defined in the Display Configuration Menu.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 USB Interface Page 65


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

10 The Profiler Option


The features covered in this section are only available on models fitted with the Profiler
(Setpoint Programmer) option. If the instrument also has the Data Recorder option fitted, it’s
Real Time Clock is used to expand the profiling capabilities by adding Day & Time profile
start options, releasing of hold segments at a specific time of day and changing the power fail
recovery option based on the length of time the power has been off for. These features are
explained below and in the Profiler Setup and Profile Control menus (refer to section 7)

Introduction
The Profiler option allows the user to store up to 255 profile segments, shared between a
maximum of 64 Profiles. Each profile controls the value of the setpoint over time; increasing,
decreasing or holding its value as required. If fitted, Profiler options are added to the Main
Menu as well as the Operation Mode.

Profiler Enabling
Controllers supplied without the Profiler option installed can be upgraded in the field by
purchasing a licence code number from your supplier. Refer to the Field Upgrade information
(Section 3) for more details.

Profile Components
The General Profile Configuration settings decide how profiles can be Run, Held or Aborted.
These settings apply to all profiles. Each profile has it’s own header information plus 1 or
more segments.

Profile Header & Segment Information


The profile header contains information about how the profile starts and stops, the power
loss recovery action and if it should repeat.
Note:

Profile Header information is stored to memory as the Segment creation sequence begins.
No profile is created if you exit before this point.
Segments can be ramps, dwells, steps or special segments such as holds, ends or joins.
Note: Segment information is stored as each segment is created, but the profile remains
invalid until an end or join segment is defined.

Page 66 Profiler Option 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Profile Starting & Standard Segments


The example below shows two profiles containing examples of the standard segment types
required to make simple profiles or profile sequences. A Start Trigger is the instruction to
begin the selected profile. Depending on the Run/Hold Signal parameter setting in the Profile
Setup Menu, this can be from a Key-press given in the appropriate screen, a digital input
signal or via a serial communications command.
Following a Start Trigger, profiles can start immediately, after a delay, or from the Timer
(Timer start available on Recorder version only).
CAUTION:

A timer start time should not clash with other profiles. A profile will not start if
another is running, including delays caused by Manual or Auto-Hold.
PROFILE 1 PROFILE 9

Target Setpoint

Ramp (Time/Rate) Step

Starting Setpoint
Start End
Trigger
Timer or Delay Dwell Join (Profile 1 to Profile 9)

Figure 38. Profile Starting and Standard Segment Types


Ramps, Dwells and Step Segments have an end of segment Target Setpoint. If the 1st
segment is a Ramp- Time, the slope needed to reach the target will be changed by the
Starting Setpoint value. For a Ramp-Rate segment, the time will change instead. A Dwell
(sometimes called a soak) holds the last segment’s value for the specified Dwell Time. Step
segments jump straight to the new target setpoint value.
If the last segment is a Join, the join target profile will start. Note: The profile sequence will
abort if the join target has been deleted. An End segment ends the profile sequence.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Profiler Option Page 67


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Loops Segments
A Loop Segment goes back to a specified segment. This action is repeated for the required
number of times (1 to 9999) before the profile continues onwards. More than one Loop
Segment can be used in a profile, but they must not cross.

Loop back target segment

Example:
Runs segments 1 to 5, then
repeats segments 3 to 5 for 500
times, before continuing on to
segments 7 to 9,
End
x 500

Loop Segment

Figure 39. Loops Segments

Profile Running / Holding vs. Hold Segments

Continue
Triggers
Hold Start

End
Run

Hold Stop Hold Segments

Figure 40. Run/Hold & Hold Segments


A Hold during a segment maintains the current setpoint value. Once the hold is stopped the
Ramp or Dwell continues. Depending on the configuration, a hold can be the started &
stopped by via a key-press, breaking the signal to a Run/Hold digital input, a serial comms
command or by the Auto-Hold feature (see below).
Note:
A running profile will also hold while Manual Control is selected.
A Hold Segment is a pre-planned hold, programmed into the profile. It maintains the value of
the previous segment. The profile does not continue until a Continue Trigger occurs. This
can be via a key-press, a digital input signal or after waiting for a time of day (available on
Recorder version only).

Page 68 Profiler Option 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

The Auto-Hold Feature


Each profile segment has individual Auto-Hold settings. If utilised, these ensure that the
profile and the actual process remain synchronised. If the process does not closely match
the required setpoint by remaining within the Hold Band, the profile can be held until it
returns within bounds.
The user can choose to hold the profile if the process beyond the Hold Band Above The
Setpoint only, Below The Setpoint only or to Band (either side of the setpoint). When Auto-
Hold is active, the profile status is shown as “Held”.

Held if Auto-Hold set to Above Setpoint or Band

Hold Band

Dwell Segment
Setpoint Process Variable

Held if Auto-Hold set to Below Setpoint or Band

Figure 41. Auto-Hold On A Dwell Segment

During a Dwell, the dwell time is increase by the time that the process is outside of the hold
band in the selected direction(s).

Held if Auto-Hold set to Above Setpoint or Band

Process Variable

Hold Band
Ramp Setpoint
(without Auto-
Hold)

Ramp Setpoint
(with Auto-Hold)

Held if Auto-Hold set to Below Setpoint or Band

Figure 42. Auto-Hold On A Ramp Segment

During a Ramp segment, the ramp is held at the current setpoint value while the process is
outside of the hold band in the selected direction(s). The time taken to complete the ramp is
increased by the time taken by the Auto-Hold.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Profiler Option Page 69


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Profile Cycles & Repeat Sequences


A profile can be configured to run itself 1 to 9999 times or continuously using the Profile
Cycles setting. A profile ending with Repeat Then End will run the entire sequence of
profiles again 1 to 9999 times or continuously.
PROFILE 4 PROFILE 31 PROFILE 7

Profile 4 Profile 7
Profile 31
Cycles = 1 Cycles = 1
Cycles = 3
Example:
Runs profile 4 once,
profile 31 three times Repeat Then End
& profile 7 once. Repeat Sequence = 10 (times to repeat = 10)
This sequence is Join (Profile 4 to Profile 31) Join (Profile 31 to Profile 7)
repeated ten times.

Figure 43. Profile Cycles & Repeats

Power/Signal Lost Recovery Actions


If there is a power cut while a profile is running, the instrument will use the defined Profile
Recovery Method once the power has been restored.

If there is a break in the input while a program is running, the unit will go to the Pre-Set
Power Value during the break condition. Once the condition has ended it carries out the
same recovery action as specified for power failure.

Note:
Recorder versions always use option E (Continue profile from the point it had reached
when the power failed) if the Power Off Time is less than the Profile Recovery Time
setting. If the power is off for more than this time, the defined Profile Recovery Method is
used.

Page 70 Profiler Option 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Power Off Power On

Run
(Start-on SP) Power Off Time

Planned Profile

= Control Off
Controller SP

Possible Recovery Methods:


A Abort the profile and maintain the profile value from the time the power failed.
B Abort the profile and use Controller Setpoint value.
C Abort the profile with the Control outputs off.
D Restart the profile again from the beginning.
E Continue profile from the point it had reached when the power failed
Figure 44. End, Abort and Recovery Actions

Profile End Actions


Once a running profile ends, that profiles’ Segment End Type defines action taken by the
instrument. If a sequence of profiles has been completed, the End Segment Type of the last
profile will be carried out. The possible end actions are explained below.

Run
(Start-on SP)

Last Profile SP

Normal Profile End


Controller SP

= Control Off
Controller SP

Possible Profile End Actions:


A At profile end, maintain the Final Setpoint value of the last segment.
B At profile end, exit Profiler Mode and use the Controller Setpoint value.
C At profile end, remain in Profiler Mode with the Control outputs off.
Figure 45. Profile End Action

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Profiler Option Page 71


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Profile Abort Actions


If a running profile is forced to end early, the Profile Abort Action defines action taken by
the instrument. This is set in the General Profile Configuration section of the Profile Setup
Menu.
The possible options are explained below.

Last Profile SP

Run
(Start-on SP)

Profile Aborted

Controller SP

Controller SP = Control Off

Possible Profile Abort Actions:


A Abort the profile and maintain the value of the setpoint at the time of the abort.
B Abort the profile and exit Profiler Mode using the Controller Setpoint value.
C Abort the profile and remain in Profiler Mode with the Control outputs off.
Figure 46. Profile Abort Action

Page 72 Profiler Option 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

11 Manually Tuning Controllers


Single Control Tuning (PID with Primary Output only)
This technique balances the need to reach setpoint quickly, with the wish to limit setpoint
overshoot at start-up or during process changes. It determines values for the Primary
Proportional Band and the Integral and Derivative time constants that allow the PID control
algorithm to give acceptable results in most applications that use a single control device.
CAUTION:
This technique is suitable only for processes that are not harmed by large
fluctuations in the process variable.

1. Check that the Setpoint Upper Limit and Setpoint Lower Limit are set to safe levels for
your process. Adjust if required.
2. Set the Setpoint to the normal operating value for the process (or to a lower value if
overshoots beyond this value might cause damage).
3. Select On-Off control (i.e. set the Primary Proportional Band to zero).
4. Switch on the process. The process variable will oscillate about the setpoint. Record the
Peak-to-Peak variation (P) of the first cycle (i.e. the difference between the highest value
of the first overshoot and the lowest value of the first undershoot), and the time period of
the oscillation (T) in minutes. See the example diagram below - Manually Tuning PID.
5. Calculate the PID control parameters using the formula below. P.Pb is the Primary
Proportional Band, Int.T is the Integral Time Constant, and Der.T is the Derivative Time
Constant. The Input Span is the difference between Scale Range Lower Limit and Scale
Range Upper Limit:

P
P.Pb = x 100
Input Span
Int.T = T minutes
T
Der.T = minutes
6
Process Variable

Time

Figure 47. Manually Tuning PID

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Manual Tuning Page 73


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Dual Control Tuning (PID with Primary and Secondary Outputs)


This tuning technique balances the need to reach setpoint quickly, with the wish to limit
setpoint overshoot at start-up and during process changes. It determines values for the
Primary Proportional Band, Secondary Proportional Band, Integral and Derivative time
constants that allow the PID control algorithm to give acceptable results in most applications
that use dual control (e.g. Heat & Cool).
CAUTION:
This technique is suitable only for processes that are not harmed by large
fluctuations in the process variable.

1. Tune the controller using only the Primary Control output as described in the Single
Control Tuning section above.

2. Set the Secondary Proportional Band to the same value as the Primary Proportional Band
and monitor the operation of the controller in dual control mode. If there is a tendency to
oscillate as the control passes into the Secondary Proportional Band, increase its value. If
the process appears to be over-damped (slow to respond) in the region of the Secondary
Proportional Band, decrease its value.
3. When the PID tuning values have been determined, if there is a disturbance to the
process variable as control passes from one proportional band to the other, set the
Overlap/Deadband parameter to a positive value to introduce some overlap. Adjust this
value by trial and error until satisfactory results are obtained.

PI Tuning (Valve, Damper& Speed Controller)


This tuning technique is used when controlling a damper, a modulating valve or motor speed
controller. It determines values for the Primary Proportional Band, and Integral Time
Constant. The Derivative Time Constant is normally set to OFF. This type of control (known
as PI Control) minimises valve/motor wear whilst giving optimal process control.
CAUTION:
This technique is suitable only for processes that are not harmed by large
fluctuations in the process variable.

1. Set the setpoint to the normal operating process value (or to a lower value if overshoot
beyond this value is likely to cause damage).
2. Set controller to On/Off Control mode (i.e. set Primary Proportional Band to the minimum
value).
3. Set the Integral Time Constant to OFF.
4. Set the Derivative Time Constant to OFF.

Page 74 Manual Tuning 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

5. Follow the instructions in the diagram below. At each stage, allow sufficient settling time
before moving on to the next stage. P.Pb is the Primary Proportional Band, Int.T is the
Integral Time Constant.

START

Process Variable
Apply Power to
the load.

Does the Time


Yes Tb
PV
continuously
Oscillate?

No

Note the time


Are the
interval T a Oscillations Yes

decaying to
zero?
Note the period
Set P.Pb = 0.8%
of the decaying
Set Int.T = T a No
oscillations (Tb)
Multiply P.Pb
setting by 1.5
Multiply P.Pb
setting by 1.5
Set Int.T = T b
2
Process Variable

END

The controller is now tuned.


Fine-tuning may be required
to optimise the controllers

Time response
Ta

Table 26. Manually Tuning Valve Control

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Manual Tuning Page 75


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Fine Tuning.
A separate cycle time adjustment parameter is provided for the Primary and Secondary
control when using time proportioning control outputs.
Note:
Adjusting the cycle time affects the controllers operation; a shorter cycle time gives control
that is more accurate, but mechanical components such as relays have a reduced life
span.
1. Increase the width of the proportional band if the process overshoots or oscillates
excessively.
2. Decrease the width of the proportional band if the process responds slowly or fails to
reach setpoint.
3. Increase the automatic reset until the process becomes unstable, then decrease until
stability has been restored.
Note:
Allow enough time for the controller and process to adjust.
4. Initially add rate at a value between 1/4th and 1/10th of the automatic reset value.
5. Decrease Rate if the process overshoots/undershoots or oscillates excessively.
Note:
When controlling a modulating valve, it is recommended that Derivative is set to OFF to
avoid excessive valve activity. Derivative can cause process instability in these processes.
6. After making all other adjustments, if an offset exists between the setpoint and the process
variable use the Bias (manual reset) to eliminate the error:
Below setpoint - use a larger value
Above setpoint - use a smaller value.

Page 76 Manual Tuning 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

12 Serial Communications
Supported Protocols
Communication with a Modbus RTU or Modbus TCP master device is possible if the
appropriate communications module is fitted into Option Slot A. An RS485 Module is
required for Modbus RTU. An Ethernet Module is required for Modbus TCP.
The instrument can also act as Setpoint Master over RS485 in multi-zone applications. In this
mode the unit continuously sends it’s setpoint value using Modbus broadcast messages.
For a complete description of the Modbus protocol refer to the description provided at
http://www.modicon.com/ or http://www.modbus.org/
All models also have a configuration socket for use with the PC configuration software. An
RS232 to TTL lead (available from your supplier) is required in order to use this socket.
A front mounted USB port is available on some models; this can also be used to configure
the instrument or to transfer recorder or profile files via a USB memory stick.

RS485 Configuration
The RS485 address, bit rate and character format are configured via the front panel from the
Comms Configuration menu or by using the PC Configurator software.
Physical layer configuration settings possible are:
Data rate: 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200 bps

Parity: None (default), Even, Odd


Character format: Always 8 bits per character.
Device Address: See below.

RS485 Device Addressing


The instrument must be assigned a unique device address in the range 1 to 255. This
address is used to recognise Modbus Queries intended for this instrument. With the
exception of broadcast messages, the instrument does not respond to Modbus Queries that
do not match the address that has been assigned to it.
The instrument will accept broadcast messages (global queries) using device address 0 no
matter what device address is assigned. No responses are returned for globally addressed
Queries.

Ethernet Configuration
For Modbus TCP communications (Modbus over Ethernet), the IP address can either be
assigned by a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), BootP or AutoIP server on the
network, or manually assigned using the IP address allocation software tool.
Refer to the PC Software section of this manual for more information setting IP addresses.
The supported data rates 10/100BASE-T (10 or 100 Mbps) are automatically detected.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Serial Communications Page 77


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Link Layer
A Query (or command) is transmitted from the Modbus Master to the Modbus Slave. The
slave instrument assembles the reply to the master. All of the instruments covered by this
manual are slave devices, and cannot act as a Modbus Master.

MODBUS SLAVE
MASTER INSTRUMENT

QUERY

RESPONSE

Figure 48. Modbus Link Layer

A message for either a QUERY or RESPONSE is made up of an inter-message gap followed


by a sequence of data characters. The inter-message gap is at least 3.5 data character times
- the transmitter must not start transmission until 3 character times have elapsed since
reception of the last character in a message, and must release the transmission line within 3
character times of the last character in a message.
Note:
Three character times is approximately 0.25ms at 115200 bps, 0.51ms at 57600 bps,
0.75ms at 38400 bps, 1.5ms at 19200 bps, 3ms at 9600 bps and 6ms at 4800bps.
Data is encoded for each character as binary data, transmitted LSB first.
For a QUERY the address field contains the address of the slave destination. The slave
address is given together with the Function and Data fields by the Application layer. The
CRC is generated from the given address, function and data characters.
For a RESPONSE the address field contains the address of the responding slave. The
Function and Data fields are generated by the slave application. The CRC is generated from
the address, function and data characters.
The standard MODBUS RTU CRC-16 calculation employing the polynomial 216+215+22+1 is
used.

Inter-message Address Function Data CRC Check


gap 1 character 1 character n characters 2 characters

Page 78 Serial Communications 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Supported Modbus Functions


Modbus defines several function types; these instruments support the following types:
Function Code Modbus Meaning Description
(decimal)
03 / 04 Read Holding/Input registers Read current binary value of specified number of
parameters at given address. Up to 64 parameters
can be accessed with one Query.
06 Write Single Register Writes two bytes to a specified word address.
08 Diagnostics Used for loopback test only.
16 (0x10 hex) Write Multiple Registers Writes up to 253 bytes of data to the specified
address range.
23 (0x17 hex) Read/Write Multiple Registers Reads and Writes 253 bytes of data to the specified
address ranges.

Function Descriptions
The following is interpreted from the Modbus Protocol Description obtainable from
http://www.modicon.com/ or http://www.modbus.org/. Refer to that document if clarification is
required.
In the function descriptions below, the preceding device address value is assumed, as is the
correctly formed two-byte CRC value at the end of the QUERY and RESPONSE frames.

Function 03 / 04 - Read Holding/Input Registers


Reads current binary value of data at the specified word addresses.
QUERY
st
Function Address of 1 Word Number of Words
03 / 04 HI LO HI LO

RESPONSE
Function Number of First Word Last Word
Bytes
03 / 04 HI LO HI LO

In the response the “Number of Bytes” indicates the number of data bytes read from the
instrument. E.g. if 5 words are read, the count will be 10 (A hex). The maximum number of
words that can be read is 64. If a parameter does not exist at one of the addresses read,
then a value of 0000h is returned for that word.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Serial Communications Page 79


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Function 06 - Write Single Register


Writes two bytes to a specified word address.
QUERY
Function Address of Word Value to write
06 HI LO HI LO

RESPONSE
Function Address of Word Value written
06 HI LO HI LO

Note:
The Response normally returns the same data as the Query.

Function 08 - Loopback Diagnostic Test


QUERY
Function Diagnostic Code Value
08 HI =00 LO=00 HI LO

RESPONSE
Function Sub-function Value
08 HI=00 LO=00 HI LO

Note:
The Response normally returns the same data as the Query. Other Diagnostic Codes are
not supported.

Function 16 - Write Multiple Registers (0x10 Hex)


Writes a consecutive word (two-byte) values starting at the specified address.

QUERY
st
Function 1 Write Number of Number of 1st Query 2nd Query Last Query
Address Words to Write Query Bytes etc
Byte Byte Byte
10 HI LO HI LO →

RESPONSE
Function 1st Word Address Number of Words
10 HI LO HI LO

Note:
The number of data that can be written in one message is 253 bytes.

Page 80 Serial Communications 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Function 23 Hex - Read / Write Multiple Registers (0x17 hex)


Reads and writes the requested number of consecutive words (two-bytes) starting at the
specified addresses.
QUERY
st st
Function 1 Read Number of 1 Write Number of Values to Write
Address Words to Address Words to st
Read Write 1 Word 2nd Word etc Last Word
17 HI LO HI LO HI LO HI LO HI LO HI LO → HI LO

RESPONSE
Function Number of Read Data
st nd
Bytes 1 Word 2 Word etc Last Word
17 HI LO HI LO HI LO → HI LO

Note:
The number of data that can be read and written in one message is 253 bytes.

Exception Responses
When a QUERY is sent that the instrument cannot interpret then an Exception RESPONSE
is returned. Possible exception responses are:
Exception Code Error Condition Interpretation
00 Unused None.

01 Illegal function Function number out of range.


02 Illegal Data Address Write functions: Parameter number out of range or not
supported. (for write functions only).
Read Functions: Start parameter does not exist or end
parameter greater than 65536.
03 Illegal Data Value Attempt to write invalid data / required action not executed.

The format of an exception response is:


RESPONSE
Function Exception Code
Original Function code with its Most as detailed above
Significant Bit (MSB) set.

Note:
In the case of multiple exception codes for a single QUERY the Exception code returned is
the one corresponding to the first parameter in error.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Serial Communications Page 81


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

13 Modbus Parameters
The Modbus parameter addresses are detailed in the tables below.
The Access column indicates if a parameter is read only (RO) or if it can also be written to
(R/W). Communications writes will not implemented if the Writing Via Serial Comms
parameter in the Comunications Configuration menu is set to Disabled.
Note:
Some of the parameters that do not apply for a particular configuration will accept reads
and writes (e.g. attempting to scale a Linear output which has not been fitted). Read only
parameters will return an exception if an attempt is made to write values to them.

Data Formats
Data can be read or written in three formats: Integer Only, Integer with 1 Decimal Place and
Floating Point Number.

The Modbus Address column shows the register address for each parameter in integer
format. Other formats can be calculated from the Integer Only address.
When working in Hexadecimal, the format calculations are:
Address for Integer with 1 Decimal Place = Integer address plus 0x4000
Address for Floating Point = Integer address multiplied by 2, plus 0x8000

When working in Decimal, the format calculations are:


Address for Integer with 1 Decimal Place = Integer address plus 16384
Address for Floating Point = Integer address multiplied by 2, plus 32768

Example Register Address Calculations


Calculating Parameter Register Addresses
Integer Only Integer+1 Floating Point
(hex) Address Address + 0x4000 Address x 2 + 0x8000
Register Address Calculation
(dec) Address Address + 16384 Address x 2 + 32768
Address Example: (hex) 0x0407 0x4407 0x880E
(For Process Variable) (dec) 1031 17415 34830
Data Value Returned: (hex) 0x00, 0x17 0x00, 0xEF 0x41, 0xBF, 0x33, 0x33
If actual Value = 23.9 decimal (dec) 23 239 23.9 as floating decimal
Address Example: (hex) 0x101F 0x501F 0xA03E
(For Selected Setpoint) (dec) 4127 20511 41022
Data Value Returned: (hex) 0x00, 0x01 0x00, 0x0A 0x3F, 0x80, 0x00, 0x00
If Value = 1 (Alternative SP) (dec) 1 10 1.0 as floating decimal

Page 82 Modbus Parameters 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Universal Process Input Parameters


Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values
(Dec) (Hex)
Universal Process 1024 0x0400 R/W Value Process Input Type
Input Type 0 B Type Thermocouple
2 C Type Thermocouple
4 D Type Thermocouple
6 E Type Thermocouple
8 J Type Thermocouple
10 K Type Thermocouple
12 L Type Thermocouple
14 N Type Thermocouple
16 R Type Thermocouple
18 S Type Thermocouple
20 T Type Thermocouple
22 PtRh 20%: 40% Thermocouple
24 PT100 RTD
26 NI120 RTD
28 0 to 20mA DC
29 4 to 20mA DC
30 0 to 50mV DC
31 10 to 50mV DC
32 0 to 5V DC
33 1 to 5V DC
34 0 to 10V DC
35 2 to 10V DC
Engineering Units 1025 0x0401 R/W Value Engineering Units
0 = None
1 = °C (Default for Europe)
2 = °F (Default for USA)
Maximum Display 1026 0x0402 R/W Value Decimal Places
Decimal Places 0 None (e.g. 1234)
1 One (e.g. 123.4)
2 Two (e.g. 12.34)
3 Three (e.g. 1.234)
Range Minimum 1027 0x0403 R/W Valid between input range maximum and minimum
Range Maximum 1028 0x0404 R/W (see Specifications Section for input details)
Process Variable 1029 0x0405 R/W Valid between scale range maximum and minimum
Offset
Filter Time Constant 1030 0x0406 R/W Valid between 0.0 and 512.0
Process Variable 1031 0x0407 RO The current process input value
Input Signal /Sensor 1032 0x0408 RO Value Process Input Break Status
Break Flag 0 Inactive
1 Active

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Modbus Parameters Page 83


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
Input Signal Under 1033 0x0409 RO Value Process Input Under Range Status
Range Flag 0 Inactive
1 Active
Input Signal Over 1034 0x040A RO Value Process Input Over Range Status
Range Flag 0 Inactive
1 Active
Cold Junction 1035 0x040B R/W Value CJC Status
Compensation 0 Disabled
Enable/disable
1 Enabled (default)
Calibration Reminder 1048 0x0418 R/W Value Calibration Reminder Status
Enable 0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Calibration Reminder 1049 0x0419 R/W Data Format = ddmmyy where dd = day, mm = month
Date and yy = year (e.g. 200308 is 20th March 2008)
Calibration Reminder 1052 0x041C RO Value Calibration Status
Status 0 Calibration OK
1 Calibration Required
Multi-point Scaling 1053 0x041D R/W Value Multi-point Scaling Status
Enable 0 Disabled
1 Enabled (only if the input type is linear)
Scale Point 1 1054 0x041E R/W 0.1 to 100.0%
Display Point 1 1055 0x041F R/W Valid between scale range maximum and minimum
Scale Point 2 1056 0x0420 R/W >Scale point 1 to 100.0%
Display Point 2 1057 0x0421 R/W Valid between scale range maximum and minimum
Scale Point 3 1058 0x0422 R/W >Scale point 2 to 100.0%
Display Point 3 1059 0x0423 R/W Valid between scale range maximum and minimum
Scale Point 4 1060 0x0424 R/W >Scale point 3 to 100.0%
Display Point 4 1061 0x0425 R/W Valid between scale range maximum and minimum
Scale Point 5 1062 0x0426 R/W >Scale point 4 to 100.0%
Display Point 5 1063 0x0427 R/W Valid between scale range maximum and minimum
Scale Point 6 1064 0x0428 R/W >Scale point 5 to 100.0%
Display Point 6 1065 0x0429 R/W Valid between scale range maximum and minimum
Scale Point 7 1066 0x042A R/W >Scale point 6 to 100.0%
Display Point 7 1067 0x042B R/W Valid between scale range maximum and minimum
Scale Point 8 1068 0x042C R/W >Scale point 7 to 100.0%
Display Point 8 1069 0x042D R/W Valid between scale range maximum and minimum
Scale Point 9 1070 0x042E R/W >Scale point 8 to 100.0%
Display Point 9 1071 0x042F R/W Valid between scale range maximum and minimum
Scale Point 10 1072 0x0430 R/W >Scale point 9 to 100.0%
Display Point 10 1073 0x0431 R/W Valid between scale range maximum and minimum
Scale Point 11 1074 0x0432 R/W >Scale point 10 to 100.0%
Display Point 11 1075 0x0433 R/W Valid between scale range maximum and minimum
Scale Point 12 1076 0x0434 R/W >Scale point 11 to 100.0%
Display Point 12 1077 0x0435 R/W Valid between scale range maximum and minimum
Scale Point 13 1078 0x0436 R/W >Scale point 12 to 100.0%
Display Point 13 1079 0x0437 R/W Valid between scale range maximum and minimum

Page 84 Modbus Parameters 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
Scale Point 14 1080 0x0438 R/W >Scale point 13 to 100.0%
Display Point 14 1081 0x0439 R/W Valid between scale range maximum and minimum
Scale Point 15 1082 0x043A R/W >Scale point 14 to 100.0%
Display Point 15 1083 0x043B R/W Valid between scale range maximum and minimum

Option Slot A Parameters


Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values
(Dec) (Hex)
Digital Input A Status 2115 0x0845 RO Value Digital Input A Status
0 Inactive
1 Active
Option Slot A 2116 0x0844 RO Value Module Fitted In Slot A
Module Type 0 None Fitted
1 RS485 Communications
3 Digital Input
4 Auxiliary Input A
5 Ethernet Communications
255 Error (unrecognised module)
RS485 Address 2117 0x0845 R/W Value RS485 Address
0 Modbus Master mode
1 to 255 Modbus Slave Address
RS485 Data Rate 2118 0x0846 R/W Value Baud Rate
0 4800
1 9600
2 19200 (Default)
3 38400
4 57600
5 115200
RS485 Parity 2119 0x0847 R/W Value Parity
0 None
1 Even
2 Odd
Auxiliary Input A 2120 0x0848 R/W Value Auxiliary A Input Type
Type 0 0 to 20mA DC
1 4 to 20mA DC
2 0 to 10V DC
3 2 to 10V DC
4 0 to 5V DC
5 1 to 5V DC
Target Setpoint 2121 0x0849 R/W Target setpoint parameter address for master mode
Address
Master Transmit 2123 0x084B R/W Value Data Format
Format 0 Integer
1 Integer with 1 decimal place
2 Floating point number

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Modbus Parameters Page 85


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
Comms Write 2124 0x084C R/W Value Communications Status
Enable/Disable 0 Writing via serial communications disabled
1 Writing via serial communications enabled
Auxiliary Input A 2127 0x084F RO Value Auxiliary Input A Break Status
Input Signal Break 0 Inactive
1 Active
Auxiliary Input A 2128 0x0850 RO Value Auxiliary Input A Under Range Status
Input Signal Under 0 Inactive
Range
1 Active
Auxiliary Input A 2129 0x0851 RO Value Auxiliary Input A Over Range Status
Input Signal Over 0 Inactive
Range
1 Active

Option Slot B Parameters


Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values
(Dec) (Hex)
Auxiliary Input B 2080 0x0820 R/W Value Auxiliary B Input Type
Type 0 0 to 20mA DC
1 4 to 20mA DC
2 0 to 10V DC
3 2 to 10V DC
4 0 to 5V DC
5 1 to 5V DC
6 0 to 100mV DC
7 >2000 Ohm Potentiometer
Option Slot B 2081 0x0821 RO Value Module Fitted In Slot B
Module Type 0 None Fitted
1 Auxiliary Input B with Digital Input B
255 Error (unrecognised module)
Auxiliary Input B 2082 0x0822 RO Value Auxiliary Input B Break Status
Input Signal Break 0 Inactive
1 Active
Auxiliary Input B 2083 0x0823 RO Value Auxiliary Input B Under Range Status
Input Signal Under 0 Inactive
Range
1 Active
Auxiliary Input B 2084 0x0824 RO Value Auxiliary Input B Over Range Status
Input Signal Over 0 Inactive
Range
1 Active
Digital Input B Status 2085 0x0825 RO Value Digital Input B Status
0 Inactive
1 Active
Calibration Status 2086 0x0826 RO Value Calibration Status
0 Calibration OK
1 Calibration Required

Page 86 Modbus Parameters 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Option Slot 1 Parameters


Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values
(Dec) (Hex)
Option Slot 1 2130 0x0852 RO Value Module Fitted In Slot 1
Module Type 0 None Fitted
1 Single Relay
2 Single SSR Driver
3 Linear mA/V DC
8 Triac
255 Error (unrecognised module)
Linear mA/V DC 2131 0x0853 R/W Value Linear Output 1 Type
Output 1 Type 0 0 to 5V DC
1 0 to 10V DC
2 2 to 10V DC
3 0 to 20mA DC
4 4 to 20mA DC
5 Variable 0 to 10VDC Transmitter PSU
Digital Output 1 2132 0x0854 RO Value Digital Output 1 Status
Status 0 Inactive
1 Active
Linear Output 1 2134 0x0856 RO -2.0% to 102.0% of nominal range
Level Status (control output will over/under drive by 2%).
Linear Output 1 2144 0x0860 R/W Value Linear Output 1 Function
Function 0 Disabled
1 Primary Output Power
2 Secondary Output Power
3 Retransmit Actual Setpoint Value
4 Retransmit Process Variable Value
Digital Output 1 2146 0x0862 R/W Value Digital Output 1 Function
Function 0 Disabled
1 Primary Output Power
2 Secondary Output Power
3 Alarm
4 Alarm and Event
Output 1 Alarm 2148 0x0864 R/W Value Output 1 Alarm Selection
Selection 0 Alarm 1. Direct Acting
1 Alarm 1. Reverse Acting
2 Alarm 2, Direct Acting
3 Alarm 2. Reverse Acting
4 Alarm 3. Direct Acting
5 Alarm 3. Reverse Acting
6 Alarm 4. Direct Acting
7 Alarm 4. Reverse Acting
8 Alarm 5. Direct Acting
9 Alarm 5. Reverse Acting
10 OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Direct
11 OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Reverse

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Modbus Parameters Page 87


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
12 OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Direct
13 OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Reverse
14 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Direct
15 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Reverse
16 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Direct
17 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Reverse
Output 1 Event And 2150 0x0866 R/W Value Output 1 Event And Alarm Selection
Alarm Selection 0 Event 1. Direct Acting
1 Event 1. Reverse Acting
2 Event 2. Direct Acting
3 Event 2. Reverse Acting
4 Event 3. Direct Acting
5 Event 3. Reverse Acting
6 Event 4. Direct Acting
7 Event 4. Reverse Acting
8 Event 5. Direct Acting
9 Event 5. Reverse Acting
10 Profile Running. Direct Acting
11 Profile Running. Reverse Acting
12 End of Profile. Direct Acting
13 End of Profile. Reverse Acting
14 Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Direct Acting
15 Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Reverse Acting
16 Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Direct Acting
17 Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Reverse Acting
18 Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Direct Acting
19 Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Reverse Acting
20 Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Direct Acting
21 Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Reverse Acting
22 Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Direct Acting
23 Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Reverse Acting
Output 1 Retransmit 2152 0x0868 R/W Limited by input range maximum and minimum
Minimum
Output 1 Retransmit 2153 0x0869 R/W Limited by input range maximum and minimum
Maximum
Note:
Digital Outputs are Relays, SSR Drivers or Triacs. Linear Outputs are mA or VDC

Page 88 Modbus Parameters 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Option Slot 2 Parameters


Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values
(Dec) (Hex)
Option Slot 2 2160 0x0870 RO Value Module Fitted In Slot 2
Module Type 0 None Fitted
1 Single Relay
2 Single SSR Driver
3 Linear mA/V DC
8 Triac
9 Dual Relay
10 Dual SSR Driver
11 24VDC Transmitter PSU
255 Error (unrecognised module)
Linear mA/V DC 2161 0x0871 R/W Value Linear Output 2 Type
Output 2 Type 0 0 to 5V DC
1 0 to 10V DC
2 2 to 10V DC
3 0 to 20mA DC
4 4 to 20mA DC
5 Variable 0 to 10VDC Transmitter PSU
Digital Output 2 or 2162 0x0872 RO Value Digital Output 2 or 2A Status
2A Status 0 Inactive
1 Active
Digital Output 2B 2163 0x0873 RO Value Digital Output 2B Status
Status 0 Inactive
1 Active
Linear Output 2 2164 0x0874 RO -2.0% to 102.0% of nominal range
Level Status (control output will over/under drive by 2%).
Linear Output 2 or 2174 0x087E R/W Value Linear Output 2 or 2A Function
2A Function 0 Disabled
1 Primary Output Power
2 Secondary Output Power
3 Retransmit Actual Setpoint Value
4 Retransmit Process Variable Value
Digital Output 2 or 2176 0x0880 R/W Value Digital Output 2 or 2A Function
2A Function 0 Disabled
1 Primary Output Power
2 Secondary Output Power
3 Alarm
4 Alarm and Event

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Modbus Parameters Page 89


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
Digital Output 2B 2177 0x0881 R/W Value Digital Output 2B Function
Function 0 Disabled
1 Primary Output Power
2 Secondary Output Power
3 Alarm
4 Alarm and Event
Output 2 or 2A 2178 0x0882 R/W Value Output 2 or 2A Alarm Selection
Alarm Selection 0 Alarm 1. Direct Acting
1 Alarm 1. Reverse Acting
2 Alarm 2, Direct Acting
3 Alarm 2. Reverse Acting
4 Alarm 3. Direct Acting
5 Alarm 3. Reverse Acting
6 Alarm 4. Direct Acting
7 Alarm 4. Reverse Acting
8 Alarm 5. Direct Acting
9 Alarm 5. Reverse Acting
10 OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Direct
11 OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Reverse
12 OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Direct
13 OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Reverse
14 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Direct
15 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Reverse
16 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Direct
17 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Reverse
Output 2B Alarm 2179 0x0883 R/W Value Output 2B Alarm Selection
Selection 0 Alarm 1. Direct Acting
1 Alarm 1. Reverse Acting
2 Alarm 2, Direct Acting
3 Alarm 2. Reverse Acting
4 Alarm 3. Direct Acting
5 Alarm 3. Reverse Acting
6 Alarm 4. Direct Acting
7 Alarm 4. Reverse Acting
8 Alarm 5. Direct Acting
9 Alarm 5. Reverse Acting
10 OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Direct
11 OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Reverse
12 OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Direct
13 OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Reverse
14 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Direct
15 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Reverse
16 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Direct
17 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Reverse

Page 90 Modbus Parameters 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
Output 2 or 2A 2180 0x0884 R/W Value Output 2 or 2A Event/Alarm Selection
Event And Alarm 0 Event 1. Direct Acting
Selection
1 Event 1. Reverse Acting
2 Event 2. Direct Acting
3 Event 2. Reverse Acting
4 Event 3. Direct Acting
5 Event 3. Reverse Acting
6 Event 4. Direct Acting
7 Event 4. Reverse Acting
8 Event 5. Direct Acting
9 Event 5. Reverse Acting
10 Profile Running. Direct Acting
11 Profile Running. Reverse Acting
12 End of Profile. Direct Acting
13 End of Profile. Reverse Acting
14 Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Direct Acting
15 Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Reverse Acting
16 Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Direct Acting
17 Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Reverse Acting
18 Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Direct Acting
19 Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Reverse Acting
20 Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Direct Acting
21 Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Reverse Acting
22 Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Direct Acting
23 Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Reverse Acting
Output 2B Event 2181 0x0885 R/W Value Output 2B Event/Alarm Selection
And Alarm Selection 0 Event 1. Direct Acting
1 Event 1. Reverse Acting
2 Event 2. Direct Acting
3 Event 2. Reverse Acting
4 Event 3. Direct Acting
5 Event 3. Reverse Acting
6 Event 4. Direct Acting
7 Event 4. Reverse Acting
8 Event 5. Direct Acting
9 Event 5. Reverse Acting
10 Profile Running. Direct Acting
11 Profile Running. Reverse Acting
12 End of Profile. Direct Acting
13 End of Profile. Reverse Acting
14 Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Direct Acting
15 Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Reverse Acting
16 Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Direct Acting
17 Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Reverse Acting
18 Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Direct Acting
19 Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Reverse Acting

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Modbus Parameters Page 91


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
20 Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Direct Acting
21 Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Reverse Acting
22 Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Direct Acting
23 Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Reverse Acting
Output 2 Retransmit 2182 0x0886 R/W Limited by input range maximum/minimum
Minimum
Output 2 Retransmit 2183 0x0887 R/W Limited by input range maximum/minimum
Maximum

Option Slot 3 Parameters


Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values
(Dec) (Hex)
Option Slot 3 2192 0x0890 RO Value Module Fitted In Slot 3
Module Type 0 None Fitted
1 Single Relay
2 Single SSR Driver
3 Linear mA/V DC
8 Triac
9 Dual Relay
10 Dual SSR Driver
11 24VDC Transmitter PSU
255 Error (unrecognised module)
Linear mA/V DC 2193 0x0891 R/W Value Linear Output 3 Type
Output 3 Type 0 0 to 5V DC
1 0 to 10V DC
2 2 to 10V DC
3 0 to 20mA DC
4 4 to 20mA DC
5 Variable 0 to 10VDC Transmitter PSU
Digital Output 3 or 2194 0x0892 RO Value Digital Output 3 or 3A Status
3A Status 0 Inactive
1 Active
Digital Output 3B 2195 0x0893 RO Value Digital Output 3B Status
Status 0 Inactive
1 Active
Linear Output 3 2196 0x0894 RO -2.0% to 102.0% of nominal range
Level Status (control output will over/under drive by 2%).
Linear Output 3 or 2203 0x089B R/W Value Linear Output 3 or 3A Function
3A Function 0 Disabled
1 Primary Output Power
2 Secondary Output Power
3 Retransmit Actual Setpoint Value
4 Retransmit Process Variable Value

Page 92 Modbus Parameters 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
Digital Output 3 or 2205 0x089D R/W Value Digital Output 3 or 3A Function
3A Function 0 Disabled
1 Primary Output Power
2 Secondary Output Power
3 Alarm
4 Alarm and Event
Digital Output 3B 2206 0x089E R/W Value Digital Output 3B Function
Function 0 Disabled
1 Primary Output Power
2 Secondary Output Power
3 Alarm
4 Alarm and Event
Output 3 or 3A 2207 0x089F R/W Value Output 3 or 3A Alarm Selection
Alarm Selection 0 Alarm 1. Direct Acting
1 Alarm 1. Reverse Acting
2 Alarm 2, Direct Acting
3 Alarm 2. Reverse Acting
4 Alarm 3. Direct Acting
5 Alarm 3. Reverse Acting
6 Alarm 4. Direct Acting
7 Alarm 4. Reverse Acting
8 Alarm 5. Direct Acting
9 Alarm 5. Reverse Acting
10 OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Direct
11 OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Reverse
12 OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Direct
13 OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Reverse
14 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Direct
15 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Reverse
16 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Direct
17 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Reverse
Output 3B Alarm 2208 0x08A0 R/W Value Output 3B Alarm Selection
Selection 0 Alarm 1. Direct Acting
1 Alarm 1. Reverse Acting
2 Alarm 2, Direct Acting
3 Alarm 2. Reverse Acting
4 Alarm 3. Direct Acting
5 Alarm 3. Reverse Acting
6 Alarm 4. Direct Acting
7 Alarm 4. Reverse Acting
8 Alarm 5. Direct Acting
9 Alarm 5. Reverse Acting
10 OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Direct
11 OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Reverse
12 OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Direct
13 OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Reverse

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Modbus Parameters Page 93


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
14 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Direct
15 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Reverse
16 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Direct
17 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Reverse
Output 3 or 3A 2209 0x08A1 R/W Value Output 3 or 3A Event/Alarm Selection
Event And Alarm 0 Event 1. Direct Acting
Selection
1 Event 1. Reverse Acting
2 Event 2. Direct Acting
3 Event 2. Reverse Acting
4 Event 3. Direct Acting
5 Event 3. Reverse Acting
6 Event 4. Direct Acting
7 Event 4. Reverse Acting
8 Event 5. Direct Acting
9 Event 5. Reverse Acting
10 Profile Running. Direct Acting
11 Profile Running. Reverse Acting
12 End of Profile. Direct Acting
13 End of Profile. Reverse Acting
14 Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Direct Acting
15 Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Reverse Acting
16 Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Direct Acting
17 Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Reverse Acting
18 Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Direct Acting
19 Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Reverse Acting
20 Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Direct Acting
21 Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Reverse Acting
22 Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Direct Acting
23 Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Reverse Acting
Output 3B Event 2210 0x08A2 R/W Value Output 3B Event/Alarm Selection
And Alarm Selection 0 Event 1. Direct Acting
1 Event 1. Reverse Acting
2 Event 2. Direct Acting
3 Event 2. Reverse Acting
4 Event 3. Direct Acting
5 Event 3. Reverse Acting
6 Event 4. Direct Acting
7 Event 4. Reverse Acting
8 Event 5. Direct Acting
9 Event 5. Reverse Acting
10 Profile Running. Direct Acting
11 Profile Running. Reverse Acting
12 End of Profile. Direct Acting
13 End of Profile. Reverse Acting
14 Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Direct Acting
15 Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Reverse Acting

Page 94 Modbus Parameters 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
16 Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Direct Acting
17 Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Reverse Acting
18 Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Direct Acting
19 Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Reverse Acting
20 Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Direct Acting
21 Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Reverse Acting
22 Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Direct Acting
23 Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Reverse Acting
Output 3 Retransmit 2211 0x08A3 R/W Limited by input range maximum/minimum
Minimum
Output 3 Retransmit 2212 0x08A4 R/W Limited by input range maximum/minimum
Maximum

Option Slot 4 Parameters


Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values
(Dec) (Hex)
Option Slot 4 2222 0x08AE RO Value Module Fitted In Slot 4
Module Type 0 None Fitted
1 Quad Relay
255 Error (unrecognised module)
Digital Output 4 2223 0x08AF RO Value Digital Output 4A, 4B, 4C & 4D Status
Status 0 All outputs inactive
Bit 0 Output 4A Active
Bit 1 Output 4B Active
Bit 2 Output 4C Active
Bit 3 Output 4D Active
Digital Output 4A 2230 0x08B6 R/W Value Digital Output 4A Function
Function 0 Disabled
1 Primary Output Power
2 Secondary Output Power
3 Alarm
4 Alarm and Event
Digital Output 4B 2231 0x08B7 R/W Value Digital Output 4B Function
Function 0 Disabled
1 Primary Output Power
2 Secondary Output Power
3 Alarm
4 Alarm and Event

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Modbus Parameters Page 95


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
Digital Output 4C 2232 0x08B8 R/W Value Digital Output 4C Function
Function 0 Disabled
1 Primary Output Power
2 Secondary Output Power
3 Alarm
4 Alarm and Event
Digital Output 4D 2233 0x08B9 R/W Value Digital Output 4D Function
Function 0 Disabled
1 Primary Output Power
2 Secondary Output Power
3 Alarm
4 Alarm and Event
Output 4A Alarm 2234 0x08BA R/W Value Output 4A Alarm Selection
Selection 0 Alarm 1. Direct Acting
1 Alarm 1. Reverse Acting
2 Alarm 2, Direct Acting
3 Alarm 2. Reverse Acting
4 Alarm 3. Direct Acting
5 Alarm 3. Reverse Acting
6 Alarm 4. Direct Acting
7 Alarm 4. Reverse Acting
8 Alarm 5. Direct Acting
9 Alarm 5. Reverse Acting
10 OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Direct
11 OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Reverse
12 OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Direct
13 OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Reverse
14 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Direct
15 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Reverse
16 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Direct
17 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Reverse
Output 4B Alarm 2235 0x08BB R/W Value Output 4B Alarm Selection
Selection 0 Alarm 1. Direct Acting
1 Alarm 1. Reverse Acting
2 Alarm 2, Direct Acting
3 Alarm 2. Reverse Acting
4 Alarm 3. Direct Acting
5 Alarm 3. Reverse Acting
6 Alarm 4. Direct Acting
7 Alarm 4. Reverse Acting
8 Alarm 5. Direct Acting
9 Alarm 5. Reverse Acting
10 OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Direct
11 OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Reverse
12 OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Direct
13 OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Reverse

Page 96 Modbus Parameters 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
14 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Direct
15 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Reverse
16 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Direct
17 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Reverse
Output 4C Alarm 2236 0x08BC R/W Value Output 4C Alarm Selection
Selection 0 Alarm 1. Direct Acting
1 Alarm 1. Reverse Acting
2 Alarm 2, Direct Acting
3 Alarm 2. Reverse Acting
4 Alarm 3. Direct Acting
5 Alarm 3. Reverse Acting
6 Alarm 4. Direct Acting
7 Alarm 4. Reverse Acting
8 Alarm 5. Direct Acting
9 Alarm 5. Reverse Acting
10 OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Direct
11 OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Reverse
12 OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Direct
13 OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Reverse
14 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Direct
15 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Reverse
16 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Direct
17 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Reverse
Output 4D Alarm 2237 0x08BD R/W Value Output 4D Alarm Selection
Selection 0 Alarm 1. Direct Acting
1 Alarm 1. Reverse Acting
2 Alarm 2, Direct Acting
3 Alarm 2. Reverse Acting
4 Alarm 3. Direct Acting
5 Alarm 3. Reverse Acting
6 Alarm 4. Direct Acting
7 Alarm 4. Reverse Acting
8 Alarm 5. Direct Acting
9 Alarm 5. Reverse Acting
10 OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Direct
11 OR of Alarm 1 or 2. Reverse
12 OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Direct
13 OR of Alarm 1, 2, or 3. Reverse
14 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Direct
15 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, or 4. Reverse
16 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Direct
17 OR of Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Reverse

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Modbus Parameters Page 97


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
Output 4A Event 2238 0x08BE R/W Value Output 4A Event/Alarm Selection
And Alarm Selection 0 Event 1. Direct Acting
1 Event 1. Reverse Acting
2 Event 2. Direct Acting
3 Event 2. Reverse Acting
4 Event 3. Direct Acting
5 Event 3. Reverse Acting
6 Event 4. Direct Acting
7 Event 4. Reverse Acting
8 Event 5. Direct Acting
9 Event 5. Reverse Acting
10 Profile Running. Direct Acting
11 Profile Running. Reverse Acting
12 End of Profile. Direct Acting
13 End of Profile. Reverse Acting
14 Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Direct Acting
15 Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Reverse Acting
16 Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Direct Acting
17 Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Reverse Acting
18 Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Direct Acting
19 Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Reverse Acting
20 Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Direct Acting
21 Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Reverse Acting
22 Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Direct Acting
23 Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Reverse Acting
Output 4B Event 2239 0x08BF R/W Value Output 4B Event/Alarm Selection
And Alarm Selection 0 Event 1. Direct Acting
1 Event 1. Reverse Acting
2 Event 2. Direct Acting
3 Event 2. Reverse Acting
4 Event 3. Direct Acting
5 Event 3. Reverse Acting
6 Event 4. Direct Acting
7 Event 4. Reverse Acting
8 Event 5. Direct Acting
9 Event 5. Reverse Acting
10 Profile Running. Direct Acting
11 Profile Running. Reverse Acting
12 End of Profile. Direct Acting
13 End of Profile. Reverse Acting
14 Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Direct Acting
15 Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Reverse Acting
16 Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Direct Acting
17 Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Reverse Acting
18 Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Direct Acting
19 Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Reverse Acting

Page 98 Modbus Parameters 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
20 Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Direct Acting
21 Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Reverse Acting
22 Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Direct Acting
23 Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Reverse Acting
Output 4C Event 2240 0x08C0 R/W Value Output 4C Event/Alarm Selection
And Alarm Selection 0 Event 1. Direct Acting
1 Event 1. Reverse Acting
2 Event 2. Direct Acting
3 Event 2. Reverse Acting
4 Event 3. Direct Acting
5 Event 3. Reverse Acting
6 Event 4. Direct Acting
7 Event 4. Reverse Acting
8 Event 5. Direct Acting
9 Event 5. Reverse Acting
10 Profile Running. Direct Acting
11 Profile Running. Reverse Acting
12 End of Profile. Direct Acting
13 End of Profile. Reverse Acting
14 Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Direct Acting
15 Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Reverse Acting
16 Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Direct Acting
17 Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Reverse Acting
18 Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Direct Acting
19 Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Reverse Acting
20 Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Direct Acting
21 Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Reverse Acting
22 Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Direct Acting
23 Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Reverse Acting
Output 4D Event 2241 0x08C1 R/W Value Output 4D Event/Alarm Selection
And Alarm Selection 0 Event 1. Direct Acting
1 Event 1. Reverse Acting
2 Event 2. Direct Acting
3 Event 2. Reverse Acting
4 Event 3. Direct Acting
5 Event 3. Reverse Acting
6 Event 4. Direct Acting
7 Event 4. Reverse Acting
8 Event 5. Direct Acting
9 Event 5. Reverse Acting
10 Profile Running. Direct Acting
11 Profile Running. Reverse Acting
12 End of Profile. Direct Acting
13 End of Profile. Reverse Acting
14 Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Direct Acting
15 Event 1 AND Alarm 1. Reverse Acting

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Modbus Parameters Page 99


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
16 Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Direct Acting
17 Event 2 AND Alarm 2. Reverse Acting
18 Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Direct Acting
19 Event 3 AND Alarm 3. Reverse Acting
20 Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Direct Acting
21 Event 4 AND Alarm 4. Reverse Acting
22 Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Direct Acting
23 Event 5 AND Alarm 5. Reverse Acting

Setpoint Parameters
Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values
(Dec) (Hex)
Setpoint Minimum 3944 0x0F68 R/W Valid between Scale Range Maximum and Minimum
Setpoint Maximum 3945 0x0F69 R/W Valid between Scale Range Maximum and Minimum
Local Setpoint 1 3960 0x0F78 R/W Valid between Setpoint Maximum and Minimum
Value
Local Setpoint 1 3961 0x0F79 R/W Setpoint is always limited within Setpoint Maximum
Offset and Minimum
Local Setpoint 2 3962 0x0F7A R/W Valid between Setpoint Maximum and Minimum
Value
Local Setpoint 2 3963 0x0F7B R/W Setpoint is always limited within Setpoint Maximum
Offset and Minimum
Setpoint Selection 4000 0x0FA0 R/W Value Setpoint Selection Method
Method 0 Local Setpoint 1 only
1 Selected by Digital Input A
2 Selected by Digital Input B
3 Alternate Setpoint only
4 Operator or Comms selectable
Alternate Setpoint 4001 0x0FA1 R/W Value Alternate Setpoint Source
Source 0 Local Setpoint 2
1 Remote Setpoint from Auxiliary Input A
2 Remote Setpoint from Auxiliary Input B
Auxiliary Input A 4073 0x0FE9 R/W Valid between Setpoint Maximum and Minimum
Scale Minimum
Auxiliary Input A 4074 0x0FEA R/W Valid between Setpoint Maximum and Minimum
Scale Maximum
Auxiliary Input A 4075 0x0FEB R/W Setpoint is always limited within Setpoint Maximum
Offset and Minimum
Auxiliary Input A 4076 0x0FEC RO The value of analogue Auxiliary Input A
Value
Auxiliary Input B 4078 0x0FEE R/W Valid between Setpoint Maximum and Minimum
Scale Minimum
Auxiliary Input B 4079 0x0FEF R/W Valid between Setpoint Maximum and Minimum
Scale Maximum
Auxiliary Input B 4080 0x0FF0 R/W Setpoint is always limited within Setpoint Maximum
Offset and Minimum

Page 100 Modbus Parameters 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
Auxiliary Input B 4081 0x0FF1 RO The value of analogue Auxiliary Input B
Value
User Setpoint Select 4122 0x101A R/W Value Setpoint Select
0 Local Setpoint 1
1 Alternate setpoint
Setpoint Ramp Rate 4123 0x101B R/W 0 to 10000 0 or >10000 = Off
Target Setpoint 4125 0x101D RO The target setpoint value when ramping
Operator Access To 4126 0x101E R/W Value Operator Access To Ramp Rate
Setpoint Ramp Rate 0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Selected Setpoint 4127 0x101F RO Value Selected Setpoint
0 Local Setpoint 1
1 Alternate setpoint
Actual Setpoint 8256 0x2040 RO The current instantaneous value of the active setpoint

Control Parameters
Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values
(Dec) (Hex)
Manual Control 4299 0x10CB R/W Value Manual Control Selection Method
Select Method 0 Automatic Control Only
1 Manual Control Only
2 User Selectable From Key Pad
3 Digital input A
4 Digital input B
Control Enable 4300 0x10CC R/W Value Control Enable Selection Method
Select Method 0 Enabled Only
1 Disabled Only
2 User Selectable From Key Pad
3 Digital input A
4 Digital input B
Primary Cycle Time 4301 0x10CD R/W 0.5 to 512.0 Seconds
Secondary Cycle 4302 0x10CE R/W 0.5 to 512.0 Seconds
Time
Control type 4310 0x10D6 R/W Value Control Type
0 Single Control
1 Dual Control
Control Action 4311 0x10D7 R/W Value Control Type
0 Direct Acting
1 Reverse Acting
Primary Proportional 4312 0x10D8 R/W 0.0 to 999.9 (% of Input Span)
Band
Secondary 4313 0x10D9 R/W 0.0 to 999.9 (% of Input Span)
Proportional Band
Integral Time 4314 0x10DA R/W 0.0 to 5999 Seconds
Constant

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Modbus Parameters Page 101


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
Derivative Time 4315 0x10DB R/W 0.0 to 5999 Seconds
Constant
Bias 4316 0x10DC R/W For single control 0 to 100.
For Dual control -100 to 100
Overlap/Deadband 4317 0x10DD R/W -100 to 100
On/Off Differential 4320 0x10E0 R/W 0.1 to 100
Primary Power 4321 0x10E1 R/W 10 to 100% Can not be made smaller than Primary
Upper limit Lower limit + 10
Heat/Primary Power 4322 0x10E2 R/W 0 to 90% Can not be made larger than Heat/Primary
Lower limit Upper limit – 10
Cool/Secondary 4323 0x10E3 R/W 10 to 100% Can not be made smaller than
Upper Power limit Cool/Secondary Lower limit + 10
Cool/Secondary 4324 0x10E4 R/W 0 to 90% Can not be made larger than
Power Lower limit Cool/Secondary Upper limit – 10
Pre-Tune 4325 0x10E5 R/W Value Pre-Tune Engage/disengage
Engage/disengage 0 Pre-Tune OFF
1 Run Pre-Tune
Self-Tune 4326 0x10E6 R/W Value Self-Tune Engage/disengage
Engage/disengage 0 Self-Tune OFF
1 Self-Tune ON
Loop Alarm Type 4327 0x10E7 R/W Value Loop Alarm Type
1 Timed
2 Automatic (2x Integral Time)
Loop Alarm Time 4328 0x10E8 R/W 1 to 5999 Seconds after output saturation
Primary Power 4329 0x10E9 RO The current primary power (0 to 100%)
Secondary Power 4330 0x10EA RO The current secondary power (0 to 100%)
Combined Power 4331 0x10EB RO The current combined PID power (-100 to 100%)
Pre-Tune Status 4332 0x10EC RO Value Pre-Tune Status
0 Inactive
1 Active
Self-Tune Status 4333 0x10ED RO Value Self-Tune Status
0 Inactive
1 Active
Loop Alarm status 4334 0x10EE RO Value Loop Alarm Status
0 Inactive
1 Active
Input Failure Preset 4335 0x10EF R/W Power output required if input signal is lost 0 to 100%
Power (-100% to 100% for dual control).
Auto Pre-tune 4336 0x10F0 R/W Value Auto Pre-Tune
0 Disabled
1 Enabled

Page 102 Modbus Parameters 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Alarm parameters
Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values
(Dec) (Hex)
Alarm 1 Type 6144 0x1800 R/W Value Alarm 1 Type
0 Process High Alarm
1 Process Low Alarm
2 Deviation Alarm (SP-PV)
3 Band Alarm
4 Loop Alarm
5 Input/Sensor Break Alarm
6 Auxiliary Input A Break Alarm
7 Auxiliary Input B Break Alarm
Alarm 1 Value 6145 0x1801 R/W Limited by the input range maximum and minimum for
Alarm types 0 and 1. Limited by the input span for
alarm types 2 and 3. Not used for alarms 4 to 7.
Alarm 1 Hysteresis 6146 0x1802 R/W Limited by the input span
Alarm 1 Inhibit 6147 0x1803 R/W Value Alarm 1 Inhibit Enable
Enable/disable 0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Alarm 1 Status 6148 0x1804 RO Value Alarm 1 Status
0 Inactive
1 Active
Alarm 1 Inhibit 6149 0x1805 RO Value Alarm 1 Inhibit Status
Status 0 Not Inhibited
1 Inhibited
Alarm 2 Type 6160 0x1810 R/W Value Alarm 2 Type
0 Process High Alarm
1 Process Low Alarm
2 Deviation Alarm (SP-PV)
3 Band Alarm
4 Loop Alarm
5 Input/Sensor Break Alarm
6 Auxiliary Input A Break Alarm
7 Auxiliary Input B Break Alarm
Alarm 2 Value 6161 0x1811 R/W Limited by the input range maximum and minimum for
Alarm types 0 and 1. Limited by the input span for
alarm types 2 and 3. Not used for alarms 4 to 7.
Alarm 2 Hysteresis 6162 0x1812 R/W Limited by the input span
Alarm 2 Inhibit 6163 0x1813 R/W Value Alarm 2 Inhibit Enable
Enable/disable 0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Alarm 2 Status 6164 0x1814 RO Value Alarm 2 Status
0 Inactive
1 Active
Alarm 2 Inhibit 6165 0x1815 RO Value Alarm 2 Inhibit Status
Status 0 Not Inhibited
1 Inhibited

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Modbus Parameters Page 103


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
Alarm 3 Type 6176 0x1820 R/W Value Alarm 3 Type
0 Process High Alarm
1 Process Low Alarm
2 Deviation Alarm (SP-PV)
3 Band Alarm
4 Loop Alarm
5 Input/Sensor Break Alarm
6 Auxiliary Input A Break Alarm
7 Auxiliary Input B Break Alarm
Alarm 3 Value 6177 0x1821 R/W Limited by the input range maximum and minimum for
Alarm types 0 and 1. Limited by the input span for
alarm types 2 and 3. Not used for alarms 4 to 7.
Alarm 3 Hysteresis 6178 0x1822 R/W Limited by the input span
Alarm 3 Inhibit 6179 0x1823 R/W Value Alarm 3 Inhibit Enable
Enable/disable 0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Alarm 3 Status 6180 0x1824 RO Value Alarm 3 Status
0 Inactive
1 Active
Alarm 3 Inhibit 6181 0x1825 RO Value Alarm 3 Inhibit Status
Status 0 Not Inhibited
1 Inhibited
Alarm 4 Type 6192 0x1830 R/W Value Alarm 4 Type
0 Process High Alarm
1 Process Low Alarm
2 Deviation Alarm (SP-PV)
3 Band Alarm
4 Loop Alarm
5 Input/Sensor Break Alarm
6 Auxiliary Input A Break Alarm
7 Auxiliary Input B Break Alarm
Alarm 4 Value 6193 0x1831 R/W Limited by the input range maximum and minimum for
Alarm types 0 and 1. Limited by the input span for
alarm types 2 and 3. Not used for alarms 4 to 7.
Alarm 4 Hysteresis 6194 0x1832 R/W Limited by the input span
Alarm 4 Inhibit 6195 0x1833 R/W Value Alarm 4 Inhibit Enable
Enable/disable 0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Alarm 4 Status 6196 0x1834 RO Value Alarm 4 Status
0 Inactive
1 Active
Alarm 4 Inhibit 6197 0x1835 RO Value Alarm 4 Inhibit Status
Status 0 Not Inhibited
1 Inhibited

Page 104 Modbus Parameters 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
Alarm 5 Type 6208 0x1840 R/W Value Alarm 5 Type
0 Process High Alarm
1 Process Low Alarm
2 Deviation Alarm (SP-PV)
3 Band Alarm
4 Loop Alarm
5 Input/Sensor Break Alarm
6 Auxiliary Input A Break Alarm
7 Auxiliary Input B Break Alarm
Alarm 5 Value 6209 0x1841 R/W Limited by the input range maximum and minimum for
Alarm types 0 and 1. Limited by the input span for
alarm types 2 and 3. Not used for alarms 4 to 7.
Alarm 5 Hysteresis 6210 0x1842 R/W Limited by the input span
Alarm 5 Inhibit 6211 0x1843 R/W Value Alarm 5 Inhibit Enable
Enable/disable 0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Alarm 5 Status 6212 0x1844 RO Value Alarm 5 Status
0 Inactive
1 Active
Alarm 5 Inhibit 6213 0x1845 RO Value Alarm 5 Inhibit Status
Status 0 Not Inhibited
1 Inhibited

Recorder & Clock Parameters


Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values
(Dec) (Hex)
Recording Sample 7550 0x1D7E R/W Value
Interval 0 Every Second
1 Every 2 Seconds
2 Every 5 Seconds
3 Every 10 Seconds
4 Every 15 Seconds
5 Every 30 Seconds
6 Every Minute
7 Every 2 Minutes
8 Every 5 Minutes
9 Every 10 Minutes
10 Every 15 Minutes
11 Every 30 Minutes
Recording Mode 7551 0x1D7F R/W Value Recording Mode
0 Record until memory used
1 Continuous FIFO buffer
Start Stop 7552 0x1D80 R/W Value Operator Start/Stop Recording
Recording 0 Stop Recording
1 Start Recording

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Modbus Parameters Page 105


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
Data Recorder 7553 0x1D81 RO Value Data Recorder Fitted
Fitted 0 Not Fitted
1 Recorder Fitted
Memory Remaining 7554 0x1D82 RO Memory unused remaining left, in bytes
Time Remaining 7555 0x1D83 RO Time remaining until memory is used up, in seconds
Recorder Trigger 7563 0x1D8B R/W Value
0 Operator start/stop
1 Recorder Menu start/stop
2 On Alarm (see Alarm 1-5 trigger below)
3 Digital input A
4 Digital input B
5 During running of profiles
Record Process 7572 0x1D94 R/W Value Record Process Variable
Variable 0 Do Not Record PV
1 Record PV Value
Record Maximum 7573 0x1D95 R/W Value Record Max PV Since Last Sample
PV Between 0 Do Not Record Maximum PV
Samples
1 Record Maximum PV Between Samples
Record Minimum PV 7574 0x1D96 R/W Value Record Min PV Since Last Sample
Between Samples 0 Do Not Record Minimum PV
1 Record Minimum PV Between Samples
Record Actual 7575 0x1D97 R/W Value Record Actual Setpoint Value
Setpoint 0 Do Not Record Setpoint
1 Record Actual Setpoint
Record Primary 7576 0x1D98 R/W Value Record Primary Power Value
Power 0 Do Not Record Primary Power
1 Record Primary Power
Record Secondary 7577 0x1D99 R/W Value Record Secondary Power Value
Power 0 Do Not Record Secondary Power
1 Record Secondary Power
Record Alarm 1 7578 0x1D9A R/W Value Record Change Of State For Alarm 1
Status 0 Do Not Record Alarm 1
1 Record Alarm 1
Record Alarm 2 7579 0x1D9B R/W Value Record Change Of State For Alarm 2
Status 0 Do Not Record Alarm 2
1 Record Alarm 2
Record Alarm 3 7580 0x1D9C R/W Value Record Change Of State For Alarm 3
Status 0 Do Not Record Alarm 3
1 Record Alarm 3
Record Alarm 4 7581 0x1D9D R/W Value Record Change Of State For Alarm 4
Status 0 Do Not Record Alarm 4
1 Record Alarm 4
Record Alarm 5 7582 0x1D9E R/W Value Record Change Of State For Alarm 5
Status 0 Do Not Record Alarm 5
1 Record Alarm 5

Page 106 Modbus Parameters 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
Record Power 7583 0x1D9F R/W Value Record Power Turned On/Off
0 Do Not Record Power On/Off
1 Record Power On/Off
Trigger Recording 7584 0x1DA0 R/W Value Alarm 1 To Trigger Recording
On Alarm 1 0 Off
1 Trigger On Alarm 1 (if trigger is alarm)
Trigger Recording 7685 0x1DA1 R/W Value Alarm 2 To Trigger Recording
On Alarm 2 0 Off
1 Trigger On Alarm 2 (if trigger is alarm)
Trigger Recording 7686 0x1DA2 R/W Value Alarm 3 To Trigger Recording
On Alarm 3 0 Off
1 Trigger On Alarm 3 (if trigger is alarm)
Trigger Recording 7687 0x1DA3 R/W Value Alarm 4 To Trigger Recording
On Alarm 4 0 Off
1 Trigger On Alarm 4 (if trigger is alarm)
Trigger Recording 7688 0x1DA4 R/W Value Alarm 5 To Trigger Recording
On Alarm 5 0 Off
1 Trigger On Alarm 5 (if trigger is alarm)
Sample Size 7595 0x1DA5 RO Size in bytes, for current setup of recording sample
Record Event 1 7599 0x1DAF R/W Value Record Change Of State For Event 1
0 Do Not Record Event 1
1 Record Event 1
Record Event 2 7600 0x1DB0 R/W Value Record Change Of State For Event 2
0 Do Not Record Event 2
1 Record Event 2
Record Event 3 7601 0x1DB1 R/W Value Record Change Of State For Event 3
0 Do Not Record Event 3
1 Record Event 3
Record Event 4 7602 0x1DB2 R/W Value Record Change Of State For Event 4
0 Do Not Record Event 4
1 Record Event 4
Record Event 5 7603 0x1DB3 R/W Value Record Change Of State For Event 5
0 Do Not Record Event 5
1 Record Event 5
Memory Used 7605 0x1DB5 RO Recorder Memory Used. 0 (Empty) to 100% (Full)

Date format 7868 0x1EBC R/W Value Display Date Format


0 dd/mm/yyyy (European Default)
1 mm/dd/yyyy (USA Default)
Time 7869 0x1EBD R/W Format is the number of seconds since midnight.
Date 7870 0x1EBE R/W Format 6 digits. Example 280308 for 28/03/2008
Real Time Clock 7871 0x1EBF RO Value Real Time Clock Fitted
Fitted 0 Not Fitted
1 Fitted

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Modbus Parameters Page 107


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
Day Of The Week 7872 0x1EC0 R/W Value Day Of Week
1 Monday
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
7 Sunday

Display Parameters
Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values
(Dec) (Hex)
LED 1 Label 7660 0x1DEC R/W 5 ASCII characters, which can re read or written using
LED 2 Label 7661 0x1DED R/W Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to
9, a to z, A to Z, plus ( ) - and _.
LED 3 Label 7662 0x1DEE R/W Defaults: 1 = PRI (Primary); 2 = SEC (Secondary);
LED 4 Label 7663 0x1DEF R/W 3 = TUNE (Tuning); 4 = ALARM (Alarm)
LED 1 Usage 7664 0x1DF0 R/W Value LED 1 Usage
0 Primary Control
1 Secondary Control
2 Tuning
3 Any Alarm
4 Alarm 1
5 Alarm 2
6 Alarm 3
7 Alarm 4
8 Alarm 5
9 Event 1
10 Event 2
11 Event 3
12 Event 4
13 Event 5
14 Any Event
15 Manual Control
16 Profile Running
17 Profile Ended
LED 2 Usage 7665 0x1DF1 R/W Value LED 2 Usage
0 Primary Control
1 Secondary Control
2 Tuning
3 Any Alarm
4 Alarm 1
5 Alarm 2
6 Alarm 3
7 Alarm 4

Page 108 Modbus Parameters 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
8 Alarm 5
9 Event 1
10 Event 2
11 Event 3
12 Event 4
13 Event 5
14 Any Event
15 Manual Control
16 Profile Running
17 Profile Ended
LED 3 Usage 7666 0x1DF2 R/W Value LED 3 Usage
0 Primary Control
1 Secondary Control
2 Tuning
3 Any Alarm
4 Alarm 1
5 Alarm 2
6 Alarm 3
7 Alarm 4
8 Alarm 5
9 Event 1
10 Event 2
11 Event 3
12 Event 4
13 Event 5
14 Any Event
15 Manual Control
16 Profile Running
17 Profile Ended
LED 4 Usage 7667 0x1DF3 R/W Value LED 4 Usage
0 Primary Control
1 Secondary Control
2 Tuning
3 Any Alarm
4 Alarm 1
5 Alarm 2
6 Alarm 3
7 Alarm 4
8 Alarm 5
9 Event 1
10 Event 2
11 Event 3
12 Event 4
13 Event 5
14 Any Event
15 Manual Control

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Modbus Parameters Page 109


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
16 Profile Running
17 Profile Ended
Backlight Colour 7668 0x1DF4 R/W Value Backlight Colour
0 Green to Red on Alarm
1 Red to Green on Alarm
2 Permanent Green
3 Permanent Red
Display Language 7675 0x1DFB R/W Value Language
0 Main Display Language
1 Alternate Display Language
Display Contrast 7676 0x1DFC R/W 0 to 127
Invert Display 7677 0x1DFD R/W Value Invert Display
0 Normal Display
1 Inverted Display
Setup Lock Code 7678 0x1DFE R/W 1 to 9999. Default is 10
Configuration Lock 7679 0x1DFF R/W 1 to 9999. Default is 10
Code
Tuning Lock Code 7680 0x1E00 R/W 1 to 9999. Default is 10
Supervisor Lock 7681 0x1E01 R/W 1 to 9999. Default is 10
Code
Profiler Lock Code 7682 0x1E02 R/W 1 to 9999. Default is 10
USB Lock Code 7683 0x1E03 R/W 1 to 9999. Default is 10
Recorder Lock Code 7684 0x1E04 R/W 1 to 9999. Default is 10
Read Only 7685 0x1E05 R/W Value Read Only Operation Mode
Operation Mode 0 Operation Mode Read/Write
1 Operation Mode Read Only
Bar Graph Format 7686 0x1E06 R/W Value Bar Graph Format
0 Power Output
1 Control Deviation
2 % Memory Remaining
Trend View Sample 9000 0x2328 R/W Value Trend Sample Interval
Interval 0 Every Second
1 Every 2 Seconds
2 Every 5 Seconds
3 Every 10 Seconds
4 Every 15 Seconds
5 Every 30 Seconds
6 Every Minute
7 Every 2 Minutes
8 Every 5 Minutes
9 Every 10 Minutes
10 Every 15 Minutes
11 Every 30 Minutes

Page 110 Modbus Parameters 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
Values To Display In 9001 0x2329 R/W Value Trend View Data
Trend View 0 None (trend view off)
1 Process variable only
2 Process variable and setpoint
3 Process variable maximum & minimum
since last sample

Profiler Control & Status Parameters


Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values
(Dec) (Hex)
Profile Run/Hold 8192 0x2000 R/W Value Profile Run/Hold Signal Source
Signal 0 Operator Key Press Only
1 Digital input A
2 Digital input B
Profile Abort Signal 8193 0x2001 R/W Value Profile Abort Signal Source
0 Operator Key Press Only
1 Digital input A
2 Digital input B
Active Profiler 8243 0x2033 R/W Currently selected profile number (1 to 64)
Number
Active Segment 8244 0x2034 RO Currently active segment (1 to 255)
Number
Profiler Control 8245 0x2035 R/W Value Profiler Command
Commands 0 Do nothing
1 Run the currently selected profile
2 Hold the currently running profile
3 Abort the currently running profile
4 Jump to the next segment
5 Release the hold
6 Exit profiler, return to controller mode
Note: The Profiler Control Commands must be followed by a Profiler Control Confirmation Action command.
Profiler Control 8257 0x2041 R/W Value Implement Profiler Command
Confirmation Action 0 Do Not Implement Command
1 Implement previous Profiler Command
Enable Edit While 8262 0x2046 R/W Value Editing Current Running Profile
Running 0 Editing current running profile forbidden
1 Editing current running profile allowed
Profile Control In 8260 0x2044 R/W Value Profile Control From Operation Mode
Operation Mode 0 Operation Mode profile control disabled
1 Operation Mode profile control enabled
Profile Cycles Run 8247 0x2037 RO The Number of times the currently running profile has
cycled
Event 1 Status 8249 0x2039 RO Value Status Of Event 1
0 Event 1 Inactive
1 Event 1 Active

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Modbus Parameters Page 111


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values


(Dec) (Hex)
Event 2 Status 8250 0x203A RO Value Status Of Event 2
0 Event 2 Inactive
1 Event 2 Active
Event 3 Status 8251 0x203B RO Value Status Of Event 3
0 Event 3 Inactive
1 Event 3 Active
Event 4 Status 8252 0x203C RO Value Status Of Event 4
0 Event 4 Inactive
1 Event 4 Active
Event 5 Status 8253 0x203D RO Value Status Of Event 5
0 Event 5 Inactive
1 Event 5 Active
Segment Type 8258 0x2042 RO Value Segment Type Status
Status 0 No segment
1 Setpoint ramping up
2 Step
3 Dwell
4 Held
5 Loop
6 Join
7 End
8 Setpoint ramping down
Currently Active 8259 0x2043 RO The name of the currently selected profile
Profile Name
Secondary Profile 8232 0x2028 RO Value
Status 0 Profile running
1 Input sensor break
2 Profile not valid
3 Controller in manual mode
4 Profile finished. Profiler is maintaining
the last profile setpoint
5 Profile finished with control outputs off
6 Profile control has ended. Unit is
Controller Mode.
Delay time 8233 0x2029 RO The current start delay time remaining
Current Profile 8235 0x202B RO The elapsed time of the current running profile
Running Time
Current Profile 8236 0x202C RO The remaining time for the current running profile
Remaining Time
Current Segment 8237 0x202D RO The elapsed time of the current profile segment
Running Time
Current Segment 8238 0x202E RO The remaining time for the current profile segment
Remaining Time
Total Hold Time 8239 0x202F RO Total time the current profile has been held
Current Segment 8240 0x2030 RO The number of times the current looping segment has
Loops Run looped back
Profile Setup 8198 0x2006 R/W Refer to the Profile Setup Over Modbus
information below

Page 112 Modbus Parameters 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Profile Setup Over Modbus


The information in this section is intended for advanced users writing their own software
code. Most users will create or edit profiles using the instrument keypad, or using the the PC
software (available from your supplier). Either method allows quick and easy editing of
profiles.
Advanced users can setup or edit profiles by writing to the Profile Configuration parameter at
address 8198 (0x2006), This can only be access by using Modbus function code 23 (0x17).
The instrument replies with a status message.

When creating a new profile the steps below must be followed exactly, either to create a
profile at the next available position, or at a position that you specify.
Each message in the sequence includes a 2 byte Command Code that tells the instrument
the purpose of the message, and therefore the meaning of the data contained in it.

Instruction Sequence to create a profile at the next available position


1. Create a profile by writing the profile header data using the Command Code value CP
(0x43, 0x50). This starts the profile creation process by reserving a profile memory slot.
The profile number is returned by the instrument in the Edit Response Message.
2. Write the first segment using the Command Code value Code WS (0x57, 0x53). This
command will fill the next available segment position and link it to the profile created in
step 1.
3. Write the second segment, again using Command Code WS. This fills the next available
segment position and links it to the segment created in step 2.
4. Continue writing segments until the profile is complete (whilst remaining within the overall
limit of 255 segments for all profiles combined). Each of these segments fills the next
available position and links it to the previous segment specified.
5. The very last segment of the profile must be one of the end type segments. Thereafter, no
more segments can be added to the specified profile. To add a segment to an existing
profile the insert segment command must be used.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Modbus Parameters Page 113


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Instruction Sequence to create a profile at a specified profile position


CAUTION:
If this profile number is already in use then the profile header data is overwritten but
the segments associated with it are kept.

1. Determine which profile positions are being used by using the Command Code value PS
(0x50, 0x53). This command will return a list of all the profile positions currently being
used.
2. Choose a location that is not being used and write the profile header data using the
Command Code value WP (0x57, 0x50).
The profile number is echoed back by the instrument in the Edit Response Message.
3. Write the first segment using the Command Code value Code WS (0x57, 0x53). This
command will fill the next available segment position and link it to the profile created in
step 1.
4. Write the second segment, again using Command Code WS. This fills the next available
segment position and links it to the segment created in step 2.
5. Continue writing segments until the profile is complete (whilst remaining within the overall
limit of 255 segments for all profiles combined). Each of these segments fills the next
available position and links it to the previous segment specified.
6. The very last segment of the profile must be one of the end type segments. Thereafter, no
more segments can be added to the specified profile. To add a segment to an existing
profile the insert segment command must be used.

Instruction Sequence to edit an existing Profile Header


When a profile header is changed, the segments associated with it remain unchanged. They
must be edited separately if required.
7. Determine the number of the profile to be edited. The Command Code value PS (0x50,
0x53). This command returns a list of all profile positions/numbers currently in use.
8. Write a new profile header data using the Command Code value EP (0x45, 0x50).
The profile number is echoed back by the instrument in the Edit Response Message.

Instruction Sequence to read a profile


1. Use the command RP to read the profile header data
2. Use the command RS to read the 1st segment’s data
3. Use the command RS to read the 2nd segment’s data.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until an end segment is reached.

Page 114 Modbus Parameters 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

The following rules apply when creating a profile over communications:

 Profiles must always be terminated with an end segment.

 Segments can not be added after an end segment has been added.

 All changes made to the selected profile are immediately saved in the instrument.

Creating Or Editing A Profile Header


Creating Or Editing A Profile Header - Request (to instrument)
Field Name Data Comments
(Dec) (Hex)
Unit Address A/R A/R The ID address of the instrument.
Function Code 23 17 Requires the multi read/write function.
Read Start Address High Byte 32 20
Read Start Address Low Byte 06 06
Read Quantity Of Registers High Byte 00 00
Read Quantity Of Registers Low Byte 01 01
Write Start Address High Byte 32 20
Write Start Address Low Byte 06 06
Write Quantity Of Registers High Byte 00 00
Write Quantity Of Registers Low Byte 19 13
Byte Count 38 or 40 26 or 28 38dec / 0x26hex if creating a profile at the
next available location.
40dec / 0x28hex if creating a profile at a
specified location, or editing a profile.
Command Code High Byte 67, 69 or 43, 45 or Create Profile (CP) = 67dec / 0x43hex
87 57 Write Profile (WP) = 87dec / 0x57hex
Edit Profile (EP) = 69dec / 0x45hex
Command Code Low Byte 80 50
Profile Number High Byte A/R A/R Note: The profile number is not included
Profile Number Low Byte A/R A/R in the message when creating a profile
at the next available position.
Profile Name Character 1 A/R A/R The ASCII codes equivalent to each of the
Profile Name Character 2 A/R A/R 16 characters of the profile name, e.g. :
Profile Name Character 3 A/R A/R A = 65dec / 0x41, B = 66dec / 0x42 etc
Profile Name Character 4 A/R A/R a = 97dec / 0x61, b = 98dec / 0x62
Profile Name Character 5 A/R A/R The space character (32dec / 0x20hex) is
used to fill any unused characters at the
Profile Name Character 6 A/R A/R
end of the name.
Profile Name Character 7 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 8 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 9 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 10 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 11 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 12 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 13 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 14 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 15 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 16 A/R A/R
Profile Start Signal High Byte 00 00 0 = No delay, 1 = After delay, 2 = At

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Modbus Parameters Page 115


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Creating Or Editing A Profile Header - Request (to instrument)


Field Name Data Comments
(Dec) (Hex)
Profile Start Signal Low Byte A/R A/R Time/day
Profile Start Time (Byte 4 - High)
Profile Start Time (Byte 3)
Floating point number
Profile Start Time (Byte 2)
Profile Start Time (Byte 1 - Low)
Profile Start Day High Byte 00 00 1 = Monday, 2 = Tuesday, 3 = Wednesday,
Profile Start Day Low Byte A/R A/R 4 = Thursday, 5 = Friday, 6 = Saturday,
7 = Sunday, 8 = Monday to Friday,
9 = Monday to Saturday, 10 = Saturday
And Sunday, 11= All Week
Profile Starting Setpoint High 00 00 0 = Current Setpoint, 1 = Current Process
Profile Starting Setpoint Low A/R A/R Variable Value
Profile Recovery High Byte 00 00 0 = Control to off, 1 = Restart profile,
Profile Recovery Low Byte A/R A/R 2 = Maintain last profile setpoint
3 = Use controller setpoint, 4 = Continue
profile from where it was when power failed
Profile Recovery Time (Byte 4 - high)
Profile Recovery Time (Byte 3)
Floating point number
Profile Recovery Time (Byte 2)
Profile Recovery Time (Byte 1 - Low)
Profile Abort action High Byte 00 00 0 = Control to off
Profile Abort Action Low Byte A/R A/R 1 = Maintain last profile setpoint
2 = Use controller setpoint
Profile Cycles High Byte A/R A/R 1 to 9999 or 10,000 for “Infinite”
Profile Cycles Low Byte A/R A/R
CRC High Byte A/R A/R
CRC Low Byte A/R A/R
The instrument replies to this message with an Edit Response Message.

Creating, Editing or Inserting Segments


Creating new segments is only possible when a new profile is being created (see above for
instruction for creating a profile at the next available position, or at a position that you
specify). An error is returned if the correct sequence is not followed.
The Insert Segment command is used to add segments to an existing profile (one that
already has an end segment). This inserts a new segment at the position specified.
The Edit Segment command is used to alter segments of an existing profile.
The segment number is in relation to the profile number, e.g. to edit or insert a segment at
position 3 of profile 1 the segment number will be 3, and to edit or insert a segment at
position 3 of profile 6 the segment number will also be 3.

Creating, Editing or Inserting Segments - Request (to instrument)


Field Name Data Comments
(Dec) (Hex)
Unit Address A/R A/R The ID address of the instrument.
Function Code 23 17 Requires the multi read/write function.
Read Start Address High Byte 32 20
Read Start Address Low Byte 06 06

Page 116 Modbus Parameters 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Creating, Editing or Inserting Segments - Request (to instrument)


Field Name Data Comments
(Dec) (Hex)
Read Quantity Of Registers High 00 00
Read Quantity Of Registers Low 01 01
Write Start Address High 32 20
Write Start Address Low 06 06
Write Quantity Of Registers High 00 00
Write Quantity Of Registers Low 11 or 12 0B or 0C Create Segment (WS) = 11dec / 0x0Bhex
Insert Segment (IS) = 12dec / 0x0Chex
Edit A Segment (ES) = 12dec / 0x0Chex
Byte Count 22 or 24 16 or 18 Create Segment (WS) = 22dec / 0x16hex
Insert Segment (IS) = 24dec / 0x18hex
Edit A Segment (ES) = 24dec / 0x18hex
Command Code High Byte 87, 73 or 57 or 49 Create Segment (WS) = 87dec / 0x57hex
69 Insert Segment (IS) = 73dec / 0x49hex
Edit A Segment (ES) = 69dec / 0x45hex
Command Code Low Byte 83 53
Profile Number High Byte A/R A/R
Profile Number Low Byte A/R A/R
Segment Position High Byte A/R A/R Note: The Segment Position is not
Segment Position Low Byte A/R A/R included in the message when creating
a segment at the next available position.
Segment Type High Byte 00 00 0 = Ramp Time, 1 = Ramp Rate,
Segment Type Low Byte A/R A/R 2 = Step, 3 = Dwell, 4 = Hold, 5 = Loop
6 = Join, 7 = End, 8 = Repeat sequence
then end
Segment Info A (Byte 4 - High) The meaning of the data contained in
Segment Info A (Byte 3) Segment Info A depends on the type of
Floating point number segment it relates to. See below.
Segment Info A (Byte 2)
Segment Info A (Byte 1 - Low)
Segment Info B (Byte 4 - High) The meaning of the data contained in
Segment Info B (Byte 3) Segment Info B depends on the type of
Floating point number segment it relates to. See below.
Segment Info B (Byte 2)
Segment Info B (Byte 1 - Low)
Auto Hold Type High Byte A/R A/R 0 = Auto-Hold Off, 1 = Hold above SP,
Auto Hold Type Low Byte A/R A/R 2 = Hold below SP,3 - Hold above and
below SP
Auto Hold Value (Byte 4 - High)
Auto Hold Value (Byte 3)
Floating point number
Auto Hold Value (Byte 2)
Auto Hold Value (Byte 1 - Low)
Events High Byte 00 00 The status of the five events are defined by
Events Low Byte A/R A/R the lowest 5 bits of the low byte. A bit value
of 1 signifies the event is on.
Bit 0 = event 1, bit 1 = event 2, bit 3 =
event 4 and bit 5 = event 4.
CRC High Byte A/R A/R
CRC Low Byte A/R A/R

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Modbus Parameters Page 117


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Segment Data
The Segment Data is included in the command message when creating, editing or inserting
segments (see above). It is provided in two parts (Segment Info A and B).
The meaning of the data contained in Segment Info A and B depends on the type of segment
it relates to. Null is shown for unused data, these data values should be set to zero when
writing the segment data.
Segment Segment Info Description
Type A B
Ramp Time Time Target setpoint Ramp to the target setpoint “B” in the time “A”
Ramp Rate Ramp rate Target setpoint Ramp to the target setpoint “B” at the ramp rate “A”
Step Null Target setpoint Step to a target setpoint “B”
Dwell Dwell time Null Stay at the current setpoint for a period of time “A”
Hold 0 = Operator Null Wait for the operator to release the hold
1 = Time of day Start Time Wait until time of the day “B” in seconds since
midnight. (recorder only).
2 = Aux A digital Null Wait for digital input A signal
input
3 = Aux B digital Null Wait for digital input B signal
input
Loop Number of times to Segment number Loop to the specified segment number “B” from this
repeat 1 to 9999 point. Repeat this “A” times. Only segments below
the current segment can be entered. Two loops
must not cross each other.
Join Null Profile number On completion of this profile jump run profile “B”
End 0 = Control off Null Turn off all control outputs.
1 = Maintain profile Null Stay at the final setpoint of the profile
setpoint
2 = Use controller Null Use the active controller setpoint.
setpoint
Repeat 0 = Outputs off Number of times to Repeat the profile sequence number “B” times,
Sequence repeat sequence then turn off the control outputs
Then End 1 = Maintain profile Repeat the profile sequence number “B” times,
setpoint then hold the last profile setpoint.
2 = Use controller Repeat the profile sequence number “B” times,
setpoint then use the active controller setpoint.
The instrument replies to this message with an Edit Response Message.

Deleting Profiles
An individual profile can be deleted, or all profiles can be cleared with a single message.
Deleting a profile removes the header of the specified profile and any segments associated
with it. Delete all profiles wipes all profiles and segments from the instrument.

Delete Profiles - Request (to instrument)


Field Name Data Comments
(Dec) (Hex)
Unit Address A/R A/R The ID address of the instrument.
Function Code 23 17 Requires the multi read/write function
Read Start Address High Byte 32 20
Read Start Address Low Byte 06 06
Read Quantity Of Registers High 00 00
Read Quantity Of Registers Low 01 01

Page 118 Modbus Parameters 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Delete Profiles - Request (to instrument)


Field Name Data Comments
(Dec) (Hex)
Write Start Address High 32 20
Write Start Address Low 06 06
Write Quantity Of Registers High 00 00
Write Quantity Of Registers Low 02 or 01 02 or 01 Delete A Profile (DP) = 02dec / 0x02hex
Delete All Profiles (DA) = 01dec / 0x01hex
Byte Count 04 or 02 04 or 02 Delete A Profile (DP) = 04dec / 0x04hex
Delete All Profiles (DA) = 02dec / 0x02hex
Command Code High Byte 68 44
Command Code Low Byte 80 or 65 50 or 41 Delete A Profile (DP) = 80dec / 0x50hex
Delete All Profiles (DA) = 65dec / 0x41hex
Profile Number High Byte A/R A/R Note: The profile number is not included
Profile Number Low Byte A/R A/R in the message when deleting all
profiles.
CRC High Byte A/R A/R
CRC Low Byte A/R A/R
The instrument replies to this message with an Edit Response Message.

Delete A Segment
The delete segment command deletes the specified segment from the specified profile. The
following segments are move up one place in the profile (e.g. if segment 6 is deleted
segment 7 now becomes segment 6 etc).

Delete A Segment - Request (to instrument)


Field Name Data Comments
(Dec) (Hex)
Unit Address A/R A/R The ID address of the instrument as
required
Function Code 23 17 Requires the multi read/write function
Read Start Address High Byte 32 20
Read Start Address Low Byte 06 06
Read Quantity Of Registers High 00 00
Read Quantity Of Registers Low 01 01
Write Start Address High 32 20
Write Start Address Low 06 06
Write Quantity Of Registers High 00 00
Write Quantity Of Registers Low 03 03
Byte Count 06 06
Command Code High Byte 68 44
Command Code Low Byte 83 53
Profile Number High Byte A/R A/R
Profile Number Low Byte A/R A/R
Segment Number High Byte A/R A/R
Segment Number Low Byte A/R A/R
CRC High Byte A/R A/R
CRC Low Byte A/R A/R
The instrument replies to this message with an Edit Response Message.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Modbus Parameters Page 119


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Get Segments Remaining


Returns the number of unused segments remaining in the instrument. The number will be
between 0 and 255, depending on how many have been used in the profiles so far created.

Get Segments Remaining - Request (to instrument)


Field Name Data Comments
(Dec) (Hex)
Unit Address A/R A/R The ID address of the instrument as
required
Function Code 23 17 Requires the multi read/write function
Read Start Address High Byte 32 20
Read Start Address Low Byte 06 06
Read Quantity Of Registers High 00 00
Read Quantity Of Registers Low 01 01
Write Start Address High 32 20
Write Start Address Low 06 06
Write Quantity Of Registers High 00 00
Write Quantity Of Registers Low 01 01
Byte Count 02 02
Command Code High Byte 83 53
Command Code Low Byte 82 52
CRC High Byte A/R A/R
CRC Low Byte A/R A/R
The instrument replies to this message with an Edit Response Message.

Edit Response Message From Instrument


The instrument replies to each the profile or segment creation, edit or delete message with a
Edit Response Message. The same format is used when replying to the Get Segments
Remaining request.

Edit Response Message - Response (from instrument)


Field Name Data Comments
(Dec) (Hex)
Unit Address A/R A/R The ID address of the instrument
Function Code 23 17 The multi read/write function
Byte Count 02 02
Command Response High Byte A/R A/R Two data bytes containing the
Command Response Low Byte A/R A/R Command Response data (see below)
CRC High Byte A/R A/R
CRC Low Byte A/R A/R

Page 120 Modbus Parameters 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Command Response Data


The data contained in the Edit Response Message returned after each profile or segment
edit message is shown below. The data seen can be an error code, the number of unused
segments, the profile number following a successful profile header creation/edit.
The error code shown will be as appropriate for the request message and instrument status.
Command Response Name Two Byte Response Description
Low Byte High Byte
Profile Number A/R A/R The number of the profile created or edited
Segments Remaining A/R A/R The number of unused segments remaining
Command Successfully 0x4F 0x4B The command requested executed without error
Command Not Recognized 0xFF 0xFF The command is not recognized
Profile Number Invalid 0xF0 0x00 The profile number specified is not available.
Profile Name Invalid 0xF0 0x01 The profile name/characters are not valid
Start Signal Invalid 0xF0 0x02 The start signal is not recognized
Start Time Invalid 0xF0 0x03 The specified time is not within range
Start Day Invalid 0xF0 0x04 The specified day is not recognized
Starting Setpoint Invalid 0xF0 0x05 The specified starting setpoint is not recognized
Profile Recovery Invalid 0xF0 0x06 The profile recovery is not recognized
Recovery Time Invalid 0xF0 0x07 The recovery time is not within limits
Abort Action Invalid 0xF0 0x08 The abort action is not recognized
Profile Cycles Invalid 0xF0 0x09 The number of profile cycles is not within limits
Segment Number Invalid 0xF0 0x0A The segment number is not valid for this profile
Segment Type Invalid 0xF0 0x0B The segment type is not recognized
Segment Info A Invalid 0xF0 0x0C The segment information A not valid for segment
type defined
Segment Info B Invalid 0xF0 0x0D The segment information B is not valid for the
segment type defined
Auto Hold Type Invalid 0xF0 0x0E The auto hold type is not recognized
Auto hold Value Invalid 0xF0 0x0F The auto hold value is not within input span
Events Value Invalid 0xF0 0x10 The events are not within range
No Segments Remaining 0xF0 0x11 There are no more segments available
Write Length Invalid 0xF0 0x12 The number of parameters to be written are invalid
for the function requested
Segment Setpoint Clamped 0xF0 0x13 The setpoint value entered was out of bounds. It
has been clamped within the units setpoint limits.

Read A Profile Header


Read A Profile Header - Request (to instrument)
Field Name Data Comments
(Dec) (Hex)
Unit Address A/R A/R The ID address of the instrument as
required
Function Code 23 17 Requires the multi read/write function
Read Start Address High Byte 32 20
Read Start Address Low Byte 06 06
Read Quantity Of Registers High Byte 00 00
Read Quantity Of Registers Low Byte 18 12
Write Start Address High Byte 32 20
Write Start Address Low Byte 06 06

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Modbus Parameters Page 121


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Read A Profile Header - Request (to instrument)


Field Name Data Comments
(Dec) (Hex)
Write Quantity Of Registers High Byte 00 00
Write Quantity Of Registers Low Byte 02 02
Byte Count 04 04
Command Code High Byte 82 52
Command Code Low Byte 80 50
Profile Number High Byte A/R A/R
Profile Number Low Byte A/R A/R
CRC High Byte A/R A/R
CRC Low Byte A/R A/R
The instrument replies to the Read A Profile Header request as follows:

Read Profile Header - Response (from instrument)


Field Name Data Comments
(Dec) (Hex)
Unit Address A/R A/R The ID address of the instrument
Function Code 23 17 The multi read/write function
Byte Count 36 24
Profile Name Character 1 A/R A/R The ASCII codes equivalent to each of the
Profile Name Character 2 A/R A/R 16 characters of the profile name, e.g. :
Profile Name Character 3 A/R A/R A = 65dec / 0x41, B = 66dec / 0x42 etc
Profile Name Character 4 A/R A/R a = 97dec / 0x61, b = 98dec / 0x62
Profile Name Character 5 A/R A/R The space character (32dec / 0x20hex) is
used to fill any unused characters at the
Profile Name Character 6 A/R A/R
end of the name.
Profile Name Character 7 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 8 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 9 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 10 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 11 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 12 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 13 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 14 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 15 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 16 A/R A/R
Profile Start Signal High Byte 00 00 0 = No delay, 1 = After delay, 2 = At
Profile Start Signal Low Byte A/R A/R Time/day
Profile Start Time (Byte 4 - High)
Profile Start Time (Byte 3)
Floating point number
Profile Start Time (Byte 2)
Profile Start Time (Byte 1 - Low)
Profile Start Day High Byte 00 00 1 = Monday, 2 = Tuesday, 3 = Wednesday,
Profile Start Day Low Byte A/R A/R 4 = Thursday, 5 = Friday, 6 = Saturday,
7 = Sunday, 8 = Monday to Friday,
9 = Monday to Saturday, 10 = Saturday
And Sunday, 11= All Week

Page 122 Modbus Parameters 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Read Profile Header - Response (from instrument)


Field Name Data Comments
(Dec) (Hex)
Profile Starting Setpoint High 00 00 0 = Current Setpoint, 1 = Current Process
Profile Starting Setpoint Low A/R A/R Variable Value
Profile Recovery High Byte 00 00 0 = Control to off, 1 = Restart profile,
Profile Recovery Low Byte A/R A/R 2 = Maintain last profile setpoint
3 = Use controller setpoint, 4 = Continue
profile from where it was when power failed
Profile Recovery Time (Byte 4 - high)
Profile Recovery Time (Byte 3)
Floating point number
Profile Recovery Time (Byte 2)
Profile Recovery Time (Byte 1 - Low)
Profile Abort action High Byte 00 00 0 = Control to off
Profile Abort Action Low Byte A/R A/R 1 = Maintain last profile setpoint
2 = Use controller setpoint
Profile Cycles High Byte A/R A/R 1 to 9999 or 10,000 for “Infinite”
Profile Cycles Low Byte A/R A/R
CRC High Byte A/R A/R
CRC Low Byte A/R A/R

Read A Segment
Read A Segment - Request (to instrument)
Field Name Data Comments
(Dec) (Hex)
Unit Address A/R A/R The ID address of the instrument as
required
Function Code 23 17 Requires the multi read/write function
Read Start Address High Byte 32 20
Read Start Address Low Byte 06 06
Read Quantity Of Registers High Byte 00 00
Read Quantity Of Registers Low Byte 11 0B
Write Start Address High Byte 22 16
Write Start Address Low Byte 06 06
Write Quantity Of Registers High Byte 00 00
Write Quantity Of Registers Low Byte 03 03
Byte Count 06 06
Command Code High Byte 82 52
Command Code Low Byte 83 53
Profile Number High Byte A/R A/R
Profile Number Low Byte A/R A/R
Segment Number High Byte A/R A/R
Segment Number Low Byte A/R A/R
CRC High Byte A/R A/R
CRC Low Byte A/R A/R
The instrument replies to the Read A Segment request as follows:

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Modbus Parameters Page 123


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Read A Segment - Response (from instrument)


Field Name Data Comments
(Dec) (Hex)
Unit Address A/R A/R The ID address of the instrument
Function Code 23 17 The multi read/write function
Byte Count 02 18
Command Response High Byte 82 52
Command Response Low Byte 83 53
Profile Number High Byte A/R A/R
Profile Number Low Byte A/R A/R
Segment Number High Byte A/R A/R
Segment Number Low Byte A/R A/R
Segment Type High Byte 00 00 0 = Ramp Time, 1 = Ramp Rate,
Segment Type Low Byte A/R A/R 2 = Step, 3 = Dwell, 4 = Hold, 5 = Loop
6 = Join, 7 = End, 8 = Repeat sequence
then end
Segment Info A (Byte 4 - High) The meaning of the data contained in
Segment Info A (Byte 3) Segment Info A depends on the type of
Floating point number segment it relates to. See below.
Segment Info A (Byte 2)
Segment Info A (Byte 1 - Low)
Segment Info B (Byte 4 - High) The meaning of the data contained in
Segment Info B (Byte 3) Segment Info B depends on the type of
Floating point number segment it relates to. See below.
Segment Info B (Byte 2)
Segment Info B (Byte 1 - Low)
Auto Hold Type High Byte A/R A/R 0 = Auto-Hold Off, 1 = Hold above SP,
Auto Hold Type Low Byte A/R A/R 2 = Hold below SP,3 - Hold above and
below SP
Auto Hold Value (Byte 4 - High)
Auto Hold Value (Byte 3)
Floating point number
Auto Hold Value (Byte 2)
Auto Hold Value (Byte 1 - Low)
Events High Byte 00 00 The status of the five events are defined by
Events Low Byte A/R A/R the lowest 5 bits of the low byte. A bit value
of 1 signifies the event is on.
Bit 0 = event 1, bit 1 = event 2, bit 3 =
event 4 and bit 5 = event 4.
CRC High Byte A/R A/R
CRC Low Byte A/R A/R

Page 124 Modbus Parameters 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Segment Data
The Segment Data is included in the response to a Read Segment request. It is provided in
two parts (Segment Info A and B).
The meaning of the data contained in Segment Info A and B depends on the type of segment
it relates to. Null is shown for unused data, this can be any value.
Segment Segment Info Description
Type A B
Ramp Time Time Target setpoint Ramp to the target setpoint “B” in the time “A”
Ramp Rate Ramp rate Target setpoint Ramp to the target setpoint “B” at the ramp rate “A”
Step Null Target setpoint Step to a target setpoint “B”
Dwell Dwell time Null Stay at the current setpoint for a period of time “A”
Hold 0 = Operator Null Wait for the operator to release the hold
1 = Time of day Start Time Wait until time of the day “B” in seconds since
midnight. (recorder only).
2 = Aux A digital Null Wait for digital input A signal
input
3 = Aux B digital Null Wait for digital input B signal
input
Loop Number of times to Segment number Loop to the specified segment number “B” from this
repeat 1 to 9999 point. Repeat this “A” times. Only segments below
the current segment can be entered. Two loops
must not cross each other.
Join Null Profile number On completion of this profile jump run profile “B”
End 0 = Control off Null Turn off all control outputs.
1 = Maintain profile Null Stay at the final setpoint of the profile
setpoint
2 = Use controller Null Use the active controller setpoint.
setpoint
Repeat 0 = Outputs off Number of times to Repeat the profile sequence number “B” times,
Sequence repeat sequence then turn off the control outputs
Then End 1 = Maintain profile Repeat the profile sequence number “B” times,
setpoint then hold the last profile setpoint.
2 = Use controller Repeat the profile sequence number “B” times,
setpoint then use the active controller setpoint.

Read Profile Name


This command returns the name of the profile defined by the profile number requested.

Read Profile Name - Request (to instrument)


Field Name Data Comments
(Dec) (Hex)
Unit Address A/R A/R The ID address of the instrument as
required
Function Code 23 17 Requires the multi read/write function
Read Start Address High Byte 32 20
Read Start Address Low Byte 06 06
Read Quantity Of Registers High Byte 00 00
Read Quantity Of Registers Low Byte 08 08
Write Start Address High Byte 32 20
Write Start Address Low Byte 06 06

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Modbus Parameters Page 125


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Read Profile Name - Request (to instrument)


Field Name Data Comments
(Dec) (Hex)
Write Quantity Of Registers High Byte 00 00
Write Quantity Of Registers Low Byte 02 02
Byte Count 04 04
Command Code High Byte 80 50
Command Code Low Byte 78 4E
Profile Number High Byte A/R A/R
Profile Number Low Byte A/R A/R
CRC High Byte A/R A/R
CRC Low Byte A/R A/R

The instrument replies to the Read Profile Name request as follows:

Read Profile Name - Response (from instrument)


Field Name Data Comments
(Dec) (Hex)
Unit Address A/R A/R The ID address of the instrument
Function Code 23 17 The multi read/write function
Byte Count 16 10
Profile Name Character 1 A/R A/R The ASCII codes equivalent to each of the
Profile Name Character 2 A/R A/R 16 characters of the profile name, e.g. :
Profile Name Character 3 A/R A/R A = 65dec / 0x41, B = 66dec / 0x42 etc
Profile Name Character 4 A/R A/R a = 97dec / 0x61, b = 98dec / 0x62
Profile Name Character 5 A/R A/R The space character (32dec / 0x20hex) is
used to fill any unused characters at the
Profile Name Character 6 A/R A/R
end of the name.
Profile Name Character 7 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 8 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 9 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 10 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 11 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 12 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 13 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 14 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 15 A/R A/R
Profile Name Character 16 A/R A/R
CRC High Byte A/R A/R
CRC Low Byte A/R A/R

Page 126 Modbus Parameters 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Read Profile Memory Status


This command returns the status of the profile memory used. The response to this command
is to return a table of all the profile numbers that are in use. A value of 0x00 indicates that the
profile position is free and value of 0x01 indicates that the position is used by a profile. Using
this command in conjunction with the read profile name command will give a directory of
profile numbers to profile names.

Read Profile Memory Status - Request (to instrument)


Field Name Data Comments
(Dec) (Hex)
Unit Address A/R A/R The ID address of the instrument as
required
Function Code 23 17 Requires the multi read/write function
Read Start Address High Byte 32 20
Read Start Address Low Byte 06 06
Read Quantity Of Registers High Byte 00 00
Read Quantity Of Registers Low Byte 32 20
Write Start Address High Byte 32 20
Write Start Address Low Byte 06 06
Write Quantity Of Registers High Byte 00 00
Write Quantity Of Registers Low Byte 02 02
Byte Count 04 04
Command Code High Byte 80 50
Command Code Low Byte 83 53
Profile Number High Byte A/R A/R
Profile Number Low Byte A/R A/R
CRC High Byte A/R A/R
CRC Low Byte A/R A/R

Read Profile Status


The instrument replies to the Read Profile Memory Status request as follows:

Read Profile Memory Status - Response (from instrument)


Field Name Data Comments
(Dec) (Hex)
Unit Address A/R A/R The ID address of the instrument
Function Code 23 17 The multi read/write function
Byte Count 64 40
Profile 1 Position 0 or 1 0 or 1 For each of the 64 possible profile
positions, a value of 0 is returned if the
Profile 2 Position 0 or 1 0 or 1 position is free, or 1 if the position is empty.
etc…..
Profile 63 Position 0 or 1 0 or 1

Profile 64 Position 0 or 1 0 or 1
CRC High Byte A/R A/R
CRC Low Byte A/R A/R

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Modbus Parameters Page 127


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Instrument Data
Parameter Name Modbus Address Access Values
(Dec) (Hex)
Serial Number 1 210 0x00D2 RO The first 4 digits of the instrument’s Serial number.
Serial Number 2 211 0x00D3 RO The digits 5 to 8 of the instrument’s Serial number.
Serial Number 3 212 0x00D4 RO The digits 9 to 11 of the instrument’s Serial number.
Serial Number 4 213 0x00D5 RO The digits 12 to 14 of the instrument’s Serial number.
Manufacture Day 370 0x0172 RO Date of manufacture – 1 to 31 (day of month)
Manufacture Month 371 0x0173 RO Month of manufacture – 1 to 12
Manufacture Year 372 0x0174 RO 4 digit number = Year of manufacture (e.g. 2008)
USB Option Fitted 7503 0x1D4F RO Value USB Option
0 Not Fitted
1 Fitted
Data Recorder 7868 0x1EBC RO Value Data Recorder Fitted
Fitted 0 Not Fitted
1 Fitted
Profiler Enabled 8199 0x2007 RO Value Profiler Enabled
0 Profiler Not Enabled
1 Profiler Enabled
Software PRL 208 0x00D0 RO Product Revision Level – Firmware Level
Hardware PRL 207 0x00CF RO Product Revision Level – Hardware Level
Firmware Type 217 0x00D9 RO Firmware major version number
Firmware Version 218 0x00DA RO Firmware minor version number
Contact Details 1 400 0x0190 R/W 7 lines of user definable text - 26 ASCII characters
Contact Details 2 401 0x0191 R/W per line which can re read or written using Modbus
functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z,
Contact Details 3 402 0x0192 R/W A to Z, plus ( ) - and _.
Contact Details 4 403 0x0193 R/W
Contact Details 5 404 0x0194 R/W Example. To write “My Company Name” to line 1
Contact Details 6 405 0x0195 R/W send:
[ADDRESS], 16, 01, 90, 00, 08, 10, 4D, 79, 20, 43,
Contact Details 7 406 0x0196 R/W
6F, 6D, 70, 61, 6E, 79, 20, 4E, 61, 6D, 65, [CRC]

Page 128 Modbus Parameters 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

14 Calibration
WARNING:
CALIBRATION IS ONLY REQUIRED FOR INSTRUMENTS IN WHICH CALIBRATION ERRORS
HAVE BEEN ENCOUNTERED. REFER TO CALIBRATION CHECK BELOW.

CAUTION:
Calibration must be performed by personnel who are technically competent and
authorised to do so.

Calibration Reminder
Calibration of each input type is carried out during manufacture. This can be verified from
Product Information Mode. Recorder versions can provide the user with a calibration
reminder if the application requires regular checks – see Input Configuration for details.
For most applications, re-calibration is not required during the lifetime of the instrument.

Equipment Required For Checking or Calibrating the Universal Input


A suitable calibration signal source is required for each input type. To verify the accuracy of
the instrument or carry out recalibration, the listed input sources are required, with better
than ±0.05% of the reading accuracy:

1. DC linear inputs: 0 to 50mV, 0 to 10VDC and 0 to 20mADC.


2. Thermocouple inputs - complete with 0ºC reference facility, appropriate thermocouple
functions and compensating leads (or equivalent).

3. RTD inputs: decade resistance box with connections for three-wire input (or equivalent).

Calibration Check
4. Set the instrument to the required input type.
5. Power up the instrument and connect the correct input leads.
Leave powered up for at least five minutes for RTD and DC linear inputs, and at least 30
minutes for thermocouple inputs.
6. After the appropriate delay for stabilisation, check the calibration by connecting the
appropriate input source and checking a number of cardinal points.

7. Repeat the test for all required input types.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Calibration Page 129


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Recalibration Procedure
Recalibration is carried out in five phases as shown in the table below; each phase
corresponds to a basic input type.
CAUTION:
The 50mV phase MUST be calibrated before the thermocouple range.

Table 27. Input Calibration phases


DC milli-volt Calibration 50 mV
DC voltage Calibration 10 V
DC milliamps Calibration 20 mA
RTD Calibration 200 ohm
Thermocouple Calibration K type source at 0ºC

1. During the instrument’s power-up “splash screen”, press  and  together until the
Calibration Status screen is displayed.

2. Press  to select the first calibration phase (50mV Calibration)

3. Ensure that an accurate 50mV signal has been applied to terminals 2 (+ve) and 3 (-ve),
then press  +  to initiate the calibration.

4. During calibration the message “50mV DC Input Calibrating” will display for a few
seconds. This should be followed by the “Calibration Successful” confirmation.
5. If the input is misconnected or an incorrect signal is applied, the calibration will be aborted
and the display will show “Failed: Signal Too Large! or Failed: Signal Too Large!”. The
previous calibration value will be retained.

6. Press  to select the next calibration phase.

7. Repeat this process for each input type until all the phases are calibrated. For each phase,
ensure that the correct input is applied, using the correct connections.
8. Once all calibration phases are completed, recorder versions will display the Calibration
Reminder Date. If required, this can be changed to the date of you next calibration check.
Ensure that Calibration Reminders are enabled in Input Configuration to receive a
reminder.

9. Press  +  to exit to the main menu.

Note:
Calibration Mode automatically exits if there is no button activity for two minutes.

Page 130 Calibration 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

15 Appendix 1 – Glossary of Terms Used


Active Setpoint
The term Active Setpoint is used to describe the currently selected setpoint when the
instrument is in Controller Mode. Controllers can use Local Setpoint 1 and/or the Alternative
Setpoint. Only one of the setpoints can be active at any time. During Profiler Control, the
setpoint value is controlled by the profiler function.
Also refer to: Actual Setpoint, Alternative Setpoint, Controller Mode, Local Setpoints, Profiler
Mode, Remote Setpoint, Setpoint, and Setpoint Selection.

Actual Setpoint
Actual Setpoint is the current value of the setpoint. This will be different to the Active
Setpoint’s target value if the setpoint is ramping. The actual setpoint will rise or fall at the
ramp-rate set, until it reaches its target setpoint value. During Profiler Control, the Actual
Setpoint value is controlled by the profiler function.
Also refer to: Active Setpoint, Controller Mode, Profiler Mode, Setpoint, Setpoint Ramp Rate
and Setpoint Selection.

Alarm Configuration
A sub-menu of Configuration Mode used to adjust the alarm parameters. (Alarm types,
values, hysteresis and inhibiting).
Also refer to: Alarm Hysteresis, Alarm Inhibit, Alarm Operation, Alarm Types and
Configuration Mode.
Alarm Hysteresis
An adjustable band through which the process variable must pass before the alarm will
change state. This Hysteresis is only applicable to alarms based on the Process Value or
Control Deviation, as illustrated below. The band is always on the “safe” side of an alarm
point, e.g. a high alarm’s hysteresis band is below the high alarm value, and a low alarm’s
hysteresis is above the low alarm value. Rate Of Change Alarms have a different type of
hysteresis based on the length of time the rate is above the threshold.
Settings = 1 LSD to full span from the setpoint. Default value = 1 LSD.

Refer to the Alarm Hysteresis Operation diagram on the next page.


Also refer to: Alarm Types, Loop Alarm, Alarm Operation, LSD, Minimum Duration Of
Change, Process Variable, and Rate Of Change Alarm.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Glossary Page 131


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Active

Inactive Inactive

PROCESS HIGH Alarm Value


ALARM

Alarm Hysteresis Value


Process Variable

Process Variable Alarm Hysteresis Value

PROCESS LOW Alarm Value


ALARM
Inactive Inactive

Active
Alarm Value
(from Setpoint)

Process Variable Alarm Hysteresis Value

BAND ALARM Setpoint

Alarm Hysteresis Value

Alarm Value
(from Setpoint)
Inactive Inactive

Active Inactive Active


Active

Inactive Inactive

DEVIATION Alarm Value


HIGH ALARM (from Setpoint)

Alarm Hysteresis Value


Process Variable
Setpoint

Setpoint
Process Variable
Alarm Hysteresis Value

DEVIATION LOW Alarm Value


ALARM (from Setpoint)

Alarm Inactive Alarm Inactive

Alarm Active

Figure 49. Alarm Hysteresis Operation

Page 132 Glossary 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Alarm Operation
The Process and Deviation Alarm types are illustrated, together with the action of any
associated outputs.
Also refer to: Alarm Hysteresis, Alarm Inhibit, Alarm Types, Band Alarm Value, Deviation
Alarm, Latching Relay, Logical Alarm Combinations, Loop Alarm, Process High Alarm and
Process Low Alarm.
Process High Alarm Output Off. .Output On
Alarm Off. .Alarm On
Direct-Acting Alarm. Value Process Variable

Process High Alarm Output On. .Output Off


Alarm Off. .Alarm On
Reverse-Acting Alarm. Value Process Variable

Process Low Alarm Output On. .Output Off


Alarm On. .Alarm Off
Direct-Acting Alarm. Value Process Variable

Process Low Alarm Output Off. .Output On


Alarm On. .Alarm Off
Reverse-Acting Alarm. Value Process Variable

Band Alarm Output On. Output Off .Output On


Alarm On. Alarm Off .Alarm On
Direct-Acting Alarm Value Alarm Value Process Variable

Band Alarm Output Off. Output On .Output Off


Alarm On. Alarm Off .Alarm On
Reverse-Acting Alarm Value Alarm Value Process Variable

Deviation High Output Off. .Output On


Alarm (+ve values) Alarm Off. .Alarm On
Direct-Acting Alarm Value Process Variable

Deviation High Output On. .Output Off


Alarm (+ve values) Alarm Off. .Alarm On
Reverse-Acting Alarm Value Process Variable

Deviation Low Output On. .Output Off


Alarm (-ve values) Alarm On. .Alarm Off
Direct-Acting Alarm Value Process Variable

Deviation Low Output Off. .Output On


Alarm (-ve values) Alarm On. .Alarm Off
Reverse-Acting Alarm Value Process Variable
Setpoint
Figure 50. Alarm Operation

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Glossary Page 133


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Alarm Inhibit
Alarm Inhibit prevents unwanted process or deviation alarm activation at power-up or when
the controller setpoint is changed. The alarm activation is inhibited until a ‘Safe’ condition is
present. The alarm operates normally from that point onwards. E.g. if inhibited, a low alarm
will not activate at power-up, until the process has first risen above the alarm point and then
falls back below.
Settings = Inhibit or not inhibited for each alarm. Default value = None Inhibited.
Also refer to: Alarm Types and Alarm Operation.

Alarm Types
There are four basic alarm types, Process Alarms, Control Deviation Alarms, Rate of Signal
Change Alarms and Event Based Alarms.
Process Alarms are based on the absolute value of the Process Variable. If the PV rises
above a high alarm value, or falls below a low alarm value, the alarm will become active.
Deviation Alarms are based on the value of the Control Deviation error. If the PV is more
than the high deviation alarm value above setpoint, or more than the low deviation alarm
value below setpoint, the alarm will become active.
Rate Of Signal Change Alarms are based on the rate of change of the PV. If the rate of
change is greater than the alarm value for longer that the Minimum Duration time, the alarm
will activate.
Event based alarms activate when the condition for that alarm type is true. These can be
Signal Break, Low Memory Or Loop Alarms.
Also refer to: Alarm Operation, Band Alarm Value, Control Deviation, Deviation Alarm, Loop
Alarm, Process High Alarm, Process Low Alarm, Process Variable, Rate Of Change Alarm,
and Setpoint.

Alternative Setpoint
The instrument can have up to two setpoints. Local Setpoint 1 and/or an Alternative Setpoint.
The Alternative Setpoint can be chosen from Local Setpoint 2 or a remote setpoint input from
Auxiliary Input A or B if either of these are fitted. One setpoint can be chosen as the active at
using the Setpoint Selection.
Also refer to: Auxiliary Input, Local Setpoints, Remote Setpoints; Setpoint and Setpoint
Select.

Auto Pre-Tune
When the Auto Pre-Tune is enabled, the Pre-Tune feature is activated on every power-up.
Auto Pre-Tune is useful when the process to be controlled may vary significantly each time it
is run. Auto Pre-Tune ensures that the process is tuned correctly each time the process is
started. Self-Tune may also be engaged to fine-tune the controller.
Settings = Enabled or Disabled. Default value = Disabled.
Also refer to: Pre-Tune, Self-Tune, PID and Tuning.

Automatic Reset
- Refer to Integral Action

Page 134 Glossary 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Auxiliary Input
Up to two secondary linear input modules can be installed in Option Slot A and B. These can
be used as Remote Setpoint inputs. Signals can be mA, mV, VDC or Potentiometer. Auxiliary
Input B also has a Digital Input onboard.
Also refer to: Alternative Setpoint, Digital Input, Linear Input, mADC, mVDC, Remote
Setpoint and VDC

Auxiliary Input Lower Limit


When the auxiliary input is used to provide a Remote Setpoint (RSP), this setting defines the
value of the RSP when the input signal is at its minimum value (e.g. for 4 to 20mA, the value
when 4mA is applied). It may be adjusted within the range -1999 to 9999. However, the RSP
value is always constrained within the Setpoint Upper Limit and Setpoint Lower Limits.
Settings = -1999 to 9999 Default Value = Scale Range Lower Limit.
Also refer to: Auxiliary Input, Auxiliary Input Upper Limit, Auxiliary Input Offset, Remote
Setpoint, Setpoint and Setpoint Upper Limit and Setpoint Lower Limit.

Auxiliary Input Offset


Used to adjust the value of the Auxiliary Input. Positive values are added to the auxiliary
input reading, negative values are subtracted. It is adjustable in the range –1999 to 9999.
When the auxiliary input is used to provide a Remote Setpoint, this setting is added to (or
subtracted from) the remote setpoint value, but the setpoint is still constrained by the setpoint
upper and lower limits.
Settings = ±input span Default Value = Off.
Also refer to: Auxiliary Input, Remote Setpoint, Scale Range Upper Limit, Scale Range Lower
Limit Setpoint Lower Limit and Setpoint Upper Limit.

Auxiliary Input Type


Defines the type and range of the linear input signal for the Auxiliary Input. It can be mADC,
mVDC, VDC or potentiometer (mVDC and potentiometer are only available with the Full
Auxiliary input in option slot B). This can be used as a Remote Setpoint input.
Also refer to: Remote Setpoint and Setpoint.

Auxiliary Input Upper Limit


When the auxiliary input is used to provide a Remote Setpoint (RSP), this setting defines the
value of the RSP when the input signal is at its maximum value (e.g. for 4 to 20mA, the value
when 20mA is applied). It may be adjusted within the range -1999 to 9999. However, the
RSP value is always constrained within the Setpoint Upper Limit and Setpoint Lower Limits.
Settings = -1999 to 9999 Default Value = Scale Range Lower Limit.
Also refer to: Auxiliary Input, Auxiliary Input Lower Limit, Auxiliary Input Offset, Remote
Setpoint, Setpoint and Setpoint Upper Limit and Setpoint Lower Limit.

Band Alarm Value


The amount of control deviation that is acceptable before a Band Alarm is activated. If the
process variable is more than the value of this band from the actual setpoint, the alarm will
be active.
Settings = 1 LSD to full input span from the setpoint. Default value = 5 LSD’s.
Also refer to: Actual Setpoint, Alarm Operation, Alarm Types, Control Deviation, Input Span,
LSD and Process Variable.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Glossary Page 135


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Bar Graphs
The instrument displays a bar-graph in the base operation mode screen. This bar-graph will
be uni-directional or bi-directional depending on the information to be displayed. This can be:
PID Power Output (single control = uni-directional, dual control = bi-directional), Control
Deviation (bi-directional) or for Data Recorder version %Memory Used (uni-directional).
Also refer to: Control Deviation, Data Recorder, Display Configuration, Operation Mode, Main
Menu and PID

Bias (Manual Reset)


Used to manually bias proportional output(s) to compensate for the control deviation errors
due to process load variations. Bias is expressed as a percentage of output power. This
parameter is not applicable if the Primary output is set to ON-OFF control. If the process
variable settles below setpoint use a higher Bias value to remove the error, if the process
variable settles above the setpoint use a lower Bias value. Lower Bias values will also help to
reduce overshoot at process start up. Integral action performs a similar function automatically
when using PI or PID control.
Settings = 0 to 100% (-100% to +100% for dual control). Default value = 25%.
Also refer to: Control Deviation, Integral Action, ON/OFF Control, PI Control, PID,
Proportional Control, Process Variable, and Setpoint.

Bumpless Transfer
A method used to prevent sudden changes to the correcting variable, when switching
between automatic PI or PID and Manual control modes. During a transition from PI or PID to
Manual control, the initial Manual Power value is set to equal the previous automatic mode
value. The operator then adjusts the value as required. During a transition from Manual
control to PI or PID, the initial automatic value is set to equal the previous Manual mode
value. The correcting variable level will gradually adjusted by the control algorithm at a rate
dependant on the integral action resulting from the Integral Time Constant. Since integral
action is essential to Bumpless Transfer, this feature is not available if Integral is turned off.
Also refer to: Correcting Variable, Integral Action, Manual Mode, PI and PID.

Cascade Control
Applications with two or more capacities (such as heated jackets) are inherently difficult for a
single instrument to control, due to large overshoots and unacceptable lags. The solution is
to cascade two or more controllers, each with its own input, in series to form a single
regulating device. The product setpoint temperature is set on the master controller. This is
compared to the product temperature, and the master’s PID output (mA or VDC) is fed into
the auxiliary input of the slave controller as a remote setpoint input. The RSP is scaled to suit
any expected temperature. The slave loop’s natural response time should ideally be at least
5 times faster than the master.
In the example, the maximum input
represents 400ºC, thus restricting the
jacket temperature. At start-up the master
compares the product temperature
(ambient) to its setpoint (300ºC) and gives
maximum output. This sets the maximum
(400ºC) setpoint on the slave, which is
compared to the jacket temperature
(ambient) giving maximum heater output.

Page 136 Glossary 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

As the jacket temperature rises, the slave’s heater output falls. The product temperature also
rises at a rate dependant on the transfer lag between the jacket and product. This causes the
master’s PID output to decrease, reducing the ‘jacket’ setpoint on the slave, effectively
reducing the output to the heater. This continues until the system becomes balanced.
When tuning a cascade system, first set the master to manual mode. Tune the slave
controller using proportional control only (I & D are not normally required) then return the
master to automatic PID mode before tuning the master. The result is quicker, smoother
control with minimum overshoot and the ability to cope with load changes, whilst keeping the
jacket temperature within acceptable tolerances.
Also refer to: Auxiliary Input, Auxiliary Input Lower Limit, Auxiliary Input Upper Limit,
Derivative Action, Integral Action, mADC, Manual Mode, Master & Slave, Proportional
Control, PID, Remote Setpoint, Remote Setpoint Lower Limit, Remote Setpoint Upper Limit,
Setpoint, Setpoint Select, Tuning and VDC.

Clock Configuration
A sub-menu of Configuration Mode used to adjust the parameters that relate to the settings
for the Real Time Clock fitted with the data recorder option (Date, time, day of week and date
format).
Also refer to: Data Recorder and Configuration Mode

Communications Write Enable


Enables/disables the changing of parameter values via the Serial Communications link, if a
communication option such as Modbus RTU (RS485) or Modbus TCP (Ethernet) is installed.
Settings = Read Only or Read/Write. Default setting = Enabled (read/write).
Also refer to: Ethernet, Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP, RS485 and Serial Communications

Configuration Menu
A selection of sub-menus from which the user can adjust the majority of settings. There are
sub-menus for the Inputs, Control, Outputs, Alarms, Communications, Recorder, Clock,
Display and Lock Codes. Configuration Mode is entered from the Main Menu. An unlock
code is required to access this mode.
Refer to the Configuration Menu information in the Configuration & Use section.
Also refer to: Alarm Configuration, Lock Codes, Clock Configuration, Control Configuration,
Display Configuration, Input Configuration, Main Menu, Output Configuration, Recorder
Configuration, Serial Communications Configuration

Contactor
- Refer to Relay

Control Configuration
A sub-menu of Configuration Mode used to adjust the parameters that relate to the control of
the process. (Enabling control, auto/manual mode, control type and action, PID tuning terms,
power limits, sensor break action, local setpoint values, setpoint ramp rates and setpoint
selection).
Also refer to: Configuration Mode, Control Action, Control Enable, Local Setpoints, Manual
Mode, PID, Power Limits, Sensor Break Pre-Set Power, Setpoint Ramping, Setpoint
Selection and Tuning

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Glossary Page 137


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Control Deviation
Control Deviation is the difference between the Process Variable value and the Actual
Setpoint. The Control deviation error is equal to PV – SP. This value can be monitored using
a Deviation Alarm.
Also refer to: Actual Setpoint, Alarm Types, Deviation Alarm, Process Variable and Setpoint

Control Action
The primary power output direction. Reverse action is typically used with heating applications
as it increases the correcting variable as the process variable falls. A secondary output’s
action is always the opposite of the primary output.
Settings = Reverse or Direct Default value = Reverse.
Also refer to: Control Type, Correcting Variable, Direct Acting Control and Reverse Acting
Control.

Control Enable/Disable
The PID controller outputs can be temporarily turned off by disabling the control. All other
functions continue as normal. The control enable/disable function can be controlled from the
Control Configuration sub-menu or optionally from Operation Mode or via a digital input if one
is fitted.
Also refer to: Configuration Menu, Digital Input, Operation Mode and PID

Control Type
This defines if a controller has unidirectional (Single) or bidirectional (Dual) control outputs.
Single outputs have a Primary output only. This can drive the PV in one direction (e.g. heat
only, cool only, increase humidity etc). Dual outputs have both Primary and Secondary
outputs which can force the PV to increase or decrease (e.g heat & cool, humidify and
dehumidify etc).
Settings = Single or Dual Default value = Single.
Also refer to: Control Action, PID, Primary Proportional Band, Process Variable, and
Secondary Proportional Band.

Controller
An instrument that controls a process variable to a target setpoint, by applying a correcting
variable. The controller uses proportional (P, PI, PD o PID) or On-Off control methods.
Also refer to: Correcting Variable, Indicator, Limit Controller, On-Off Control, PD Control, PI
Control, PID, Process Variable, Proportional Control, Profiler and Setpoint.

Controller Mode
The normal mode of operation of the instrument when profiling is not fitted or it is not being
used.
Also refer to: Controller. Profiler and Profiler Mode

Correcting Variable
The amount of output from a controller used to adjust the process variable value up or down,
to remove any control deviation. The correcting variable is commonly referred to as the
controller output power.
Also refer to: Control Deviation, PID, Primary Power Output Limit and Process Variable

Page 138 Glossary 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

CPU
This stands for Central Processing Unit and refers to the onboard microprocessor that
controls the measurement, control, alarm and display functions of the instrument.

Current Proportioning Control


Current proportioning control can be used to produce the correcting variable on units fitted
with linear current or voltage output(s). It provides 4 to 20mA, 0-20mA, 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 2
- 10V DC for proportional control, PI, PD or PID control modes. On-Off control cannot be
used with current linear outputs.
Also refer to: Correcting Variable, Linear Output, On-Off Control, PD, PI, PID, Proportional
Control, and Time Proportional Control.

Custom Display Mode


The user can copy up to 50 Configuration Menu parameters into Operation Mode using the
PC software. It the Custom Display in enabled in the Display Configuration sub-menu, these
screens follow the normal Operation Mode screens. In this mode these screens are not pass-
code protected.
Also refer to: Control Configuration, Display Configuration and Operation Mode

Cycle Time
For time proportioning outputs, the cycle time is used to define time over which to average
the ON vs. OFF time, in order to provide the required correcting variable. Each Time-
Proportioning output has its own adjustable cycle time. Shorter cycle times give better
control, but at the expense of reduce life when used with electromechanical control devices
(e.g. relays or solenoid valves). There are separate cycle times for the Primary and
Secondary control outputs
Settings = 0.5 to 512 seconds Default value = 32 secs.
Also refer to: Correcting Variable, PID, Primary Proportional Band, Proportional Control,
Relay, Secondary Proportional Band, Solenoid Valve and Time Proportioning.

Data Recorder
The Data Recorder option can record the process value, setpoint, alarms and events over
time. Recordings can be transferred to a USB memory stick or via the serial communications
options. This option includes a USB Interface and a battery backed-up Real Time Clock.
Refer to the Data Recorder Option section of this manual for more details.
Also refer to: Recorder Configuration.

Deadband
- Refer to Overlap/Deadband.

Derivative Action
The Derivative Time Constant defines how the control action responds to the rate of change
in the process variable. This parameter is not available if primary control output is set to On-
Off, and it is normally set to OFF in modulating value applications as it can cause premature
wear due to constant small adjustments to the valve position.
Settings = OFF or 0 seconds to 99 minutes 59 seconds Default value = 01.15.
Also refer to: Modulating Valve, On-Off Control, PD Control, PI Control, PID, Process
Variable, Tuning and Valve Motor Drive Control.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Glossary Page 139


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Deviation Alarm Value


Defines the amount of control deviation considered acceptable before a deviation alarm is
activated. A positive value (deviation high) sets the alarm point above the current actual
setpoint, a negative value (deviation low) sets the alarm point below actual setpoint. If the
process variable deviates from the actual setpoint by a margin greater than this value, the
deviation alarm becomes active. If an alarm is required if the control deviation is either side
of the setpoint, consider using a Band alarm or a logical combination of a deviation high and
deviation low alarm.
Settings = 1 LSD to full span from the setpoint Default value = 5 LSD’s.
Also refer to: Actual Setpoint, Alarm Operation, Alarm Types, Band Alarm, Control Deviation,
Logical Combination, Process Variable and Setpoint.

Digital Input
An input that can be driven to one of two states (active or inactive) by and external voltage or
a contact opening/closing. Digital Inputs can be used to set the instrument in to different
states. Possible uses are to select Auto/Manual Mode, Active Setpoint, Control Enable,
Profile Run/Hold/Abort, Hold Segment Release and Recording Start/Stop.
Also refer to: Active Setpoint, Control Enable, Data Recording, Manual Mode, Profiling and
Segment Types.

Direct Acting Control


Direct action is required for applications where the primary control output will be used to
force the process variable down towards the setpoint. A typical application is a Chiller. When
the control action is selected as direct acting, primary proportional control outputs decrease
the correcting variable as the process variable reduces within the proportional band, and
primary On-Off outputs turn off when the process variable is less than the setpoint. The
control action of a secondary output is always the opposite of the primary output.
Also refer to: Control Action, Control Type, Correcting Variable, On-Off Control, Process
Variable, Proportional Control and Reverse Acting Control.

Display Configuration
A sub-menu of Configuration Mode used to adjust the display, and the parameters that relate
to Operation Mode (Custom display enable, read-only operation mode, bar-graph formatting,
trend setup, display colour & contrast and language selection).
Also refer to: Bar-Graphs, Configuration Mode, Custom Display Mode, Operation Mode, Main
Menu and Trend Display.

Display Languages
The instrument supports two languages. A main language and an alternative language. The
user can order the main language of their choice (current supported languages are English,
French, German, Italian, Spanish and Russian). In most cases the alternative language is
English (for English main the alternative is German). The user can change the language
used by downloading a new file from the PC software.
Also refer to: Display Configuration, Operation Mode, and Main Menu.

Page 140 Glossary 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Display Resolution
The maximum number of digits that can be displayed and/or the maximum number of
decimal places. Numeric values (e.g. process variable, setpoints etc) are limited to no more
than 5 digits.
The maximum number of decimal places is selectable from 0 to 3 places, but the overall 5-
digit limit means that larger values may not display the full number of decimal places. For
example, values >99.999 can have no more than 2 decimal places(e.g. 100.00).
Also refer to: LSD

Engineering Units
The Process Variable and Setpoint displays can assigned a engineering units to describe the
type of parameter connected to the process input. The engineering units for linear inputs can
be: °C; °F; °K; bar; %; %RH; pH; psi or none. For temperature inputs (RTD or
Thermocouples) they can be °C; °F or °K.
Also refer to: Linear Input, Process Input, Process Variable RTD and Thermocouple

Ethernet
A networking technology for local area networks (LANs). Used to link computers and other
equipment in order to control or share data and control such devices. If fitted with an
Ethernet serial communications module in Option Slot A, this instrument can connect to a
Modbus TCP master device over a wired Ethernet LAN.
Also refer to: Modbus TCP and Serial Communications

Indicator
An instrument that can display process values, but does not provide any control features.
Typically, alarm outputs are available that will activate at preset PV values.
Also refer to: Controller, Limit Controller and Process Variable.

Input Configuration
A sub-menu of Configuration Mode, used to adjust the parameters that relate to the process
and auxiliary inputs (type, engineering units, decimal position, scaling, offset, filter auxiliary
input settings etc.).
Also refer to: Auxiliary Input, Configuration Mode and Process Input.

Input Filter Time Constant


This parameter is used to filter out extraneous impulses affecting the process variable value.
The filtered PV is used for all PV dependent functions (display, control, alarm etc).
Settings = OFF or 0.1 to 100.0 seconds. Default value = 2.0 seconds.
Also refer to: Process Variable.

Input Range
This is the overall process variable input range and type as selected by the Process Input
Type parameter. This range can be scaled by the Scale Range Upper & Lower Limits.
Also refer to: Input Span, Process Input, Scale Range Lower Limit and Scale Range Upper
Limit.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Glossary Page 141


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Input Span
The measuring and display limits, as defined by the Scale Range Lower and Scale Range
Upper Limits. The trimmed span value is also used as the basis for calculations that relate to
the span of the instrument (e.g. proportional bands).
Settings = 100 LSD’s to the full Input Range. Default value = Input Range
Also refer to: Input Range, LSD, Primary Proportional Band, Scale Range Lower Limit, Scale
Range Upper Limit and Secondary Proportional Band.

Integral Time Constant


The Integral Time Constant biases proportional control output(s) to compensate for process
load variations, until the control deviation value is zero. Integral Time Constant is also known
as “Automatic Reset”. Decreasing the time constant increases the Integral action. This
parameter is not available if the primary output is set to On-Off.
Settings = 1 sec to 99 min 59 sec and OFF. Default value = 05:00
Also refer to: Control Deviation, On-Off Control, PI Control, PID, Primary Proportional Band,
Secondary Proportional Band, Derivative Action, and Tuning.

Latching Relay
A type of relay that, once it becomes active, requires a reset signal before it will deactivate. If
latching relays are required, they can be fitted externally as slaves to the internal (non-
latching) relays of this instrument.
Also refer to: Relay

LED
Light Emitting Diode. LED’s are used as indicator lights (e.g. for the alarm indication,
automatic tuning stats and manual mode).
Also refer to: Alarm Operation, Alarm Types, Automatic Tuning and Manual Mode.

Linear Input
A mVDC, mADC or voltage signal used to represent the value of the process variable. This
can be any variable that can be converted into a suitable DC linear signal. Common
examples are Humitity, pressure, pH or temperature.
Auxiliary linear inputs can also be installed, these can be used to provide a remote setpoint.
Also refer to: Auxiliary Input, Input Range, Linear Output, mVDC, mADC, Process Variable,
Remote Setpoint and VDC.

Linear Output
A mVDC, mADC or voltage signal used to provide a proportional control or retransmit output.
Also refer to: Linear Input mVDC, mADC, Proportional Control, Retransmit Output and VDC

Limit Controller
A safety protection device that will shut down a process at a preset “exceed condition”. Limit
controllers work independently of the normal process controller in order to prevent possible
damage to equipment or products. They are recommended for any process that could
potentially become hazardous under fault conditions. A fail-safe latching relay is fitted, which
cannot be reset by the operator until the process has returned to a safe condition.
Also refer to: Controller and Latching Relay.

Page 142 Glossary 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Local Setpoints
Local setpoints are target values that are stored inside the controller. These are normally
entered by from the front keypad, but can also be set via a serial communications link.
The instrument can have up to two setpoints. Local Setpoint 1 and/or an Alternative Setpoint.
The Alternative Setpoint can be chosen from Local Setpoint 2 or a remote setpoint from an
auxiliary input. One setpoint can be chosen as the active at using the Setpoint Selection.
The value of the setpoints can be adjusted between the Setpoint Upper Limit and Setpoint
Lower Limits.
Also refer to: Alternative Setpoint, Auxiliary Input, Remote Setpoint, Serial Communications,
Setpoint, Setpoint Lower Limit, Setpoint Upper Limit, and Setpoint Select.

Lock Codes
The four-digit codes required when entering the Setup Wizard, Configuration Mode, Tuning
Menu, Supervisor Mode, USB Menu, Recorder Menu and Profiler Setup Menu. These menus
can be selected from the Main Menu. The correct code must be entered to gain access. If
unlimited access is required for any of the menus, its lock can be turned off by setting the
value to OFF. Refer to the Lock Code View information in the Configuration & Use section.
Settings = 1 to 9999 or OFF. Default value = 05:00
Also refer to: Configuration Mode, Main Menu, Profiler Setup Menu, Recorder Menu, Setup
Wizard, Supervisor Mode, Tuning Menu and USB Menu.

Logical Combination of Alarms


Outputs for alarms may be combined to create a Logical OR situation. Possible combinations
are: Alarms 1 to 2; 1 to 3; 1 to 4 or 1 to 5.
Outputs for alarms & events may be combined to create a Logical AND situation. Possible
combinations are: Alarm 1 & Event 1; Alarm 2 & Event 2; Alarm 3 & Event 3; Alarm 4 & Event
4; and Alarm 5 & Event 5.
Any suitable output may be assigned as a logical output and can be configured for reverse
action or direct action.

Also refer to: Alarm Operation, Alarm Types, Output Configuration and Profile Events.
Table 28. Examples Of Logical Alarm Outputs
Logical OR: Alarm 1 OR Alarm 2
Direct Acting Reverse-Acting
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
ALARM 1

ALARM 2

ALARM 1

ALARM 2
OUTPUT

OUTPUT

ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF


OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON ON ON ON OFF

Logical AND: Alarm 1 AND Alarm 2


Direct Acting Reverse-Acting
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
ALARM 2

ALARM 1

ALARM 2
ALARM 1

OUTPUT

OUTPUT

ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON


OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON
ON ON ON ON ON OFF

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Glossary Page 143


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Loop Alarm
A loop alarm detects faults in the control feedback loop, by continuously monitoring process
variable response to the control output(s). If one of the 5 alarms is defined to be a loop
alarm, it repeatedly checks if the PID control output is at saturation. If saturation is reached
(0% or 100% power for single control type, -100% or +100% for dual control type), an internal
timer is started. Thereafter, if the output has not caused the process variable to be corrected
by a predetermined amount 'V' after time 'T' has elapsed, the alarm becomes active.
Subsequently, the alarm repeatedly checks the process variable and the PID output. When
the process variable starts to change value in the correct sense or when the PID output is no
longer at the limit, the alarm is deactivated.
For PID control, the loop alarm time 'T' can be automatic (twice the Integral Time value) or
set to a user defined value. Correct operation with the automatic loop alarm time depends
upon reasonably accurate PID tuning. The user defined value is always used for On-Off
control, and the timer starts as soon as an output turns on.
The value of 'V' is dependent upon the input type. For Temperature inputs, V = 2°C or 3°F.
For Linear inputs, V = 10 x LSD
The loop alarm is automatically disabled during manual control mode and during execution of
a Pre-Tune. Upon exit from manual mode or after completion of the Pre-Tune routine, the
loop alarm is automatically re-enabled.
Also refer to: Alarm Types, Control Type, Manual Loop Alarm Time, Linear Input, LSD,
Manual Mode, On-Off Control, PID, Pre-Tune, Process Variable and Tuning.

LSD
The Least Significant Digit (LSD) is the smallest incremental value that can be shown at the
defined display resolution.
Also refer to: Display Resolution.

mADC
This stands for milliamp DC. It is used in reference to the linear DC milliamp input ranges and
the linear DC milliamp outputs. Typically, these will be 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA.
Also refer to: Input Range, Linear Input, Linear Output,, mVDC, Process Variable and VDC

Main Menu
The top-level menu that allows access to operation mode as well as all other menus. These
are: configuration mode, profiler setup and recorder menus, the setup wizard, supervisor
mode and the tuning and USB menus. Most menus require an unlock code to gain access.
Refer to the Main Menu information in the Configuration & Use section.
Also refer to: Configuration Mode, Lock Codes, Operation Mode, Profiler Setup Menu,
Recorder Menu, Setup Wizard, Supervisor Mode, Tuning Menu and USB Menu.

Manual Loop Alarm Time


The loop alarm time used when a loop alarm is defined to have a manually set time or
whenever On-Off control is selected. This parameter determines the duration of the output
saturation condition after which the loop alarm will be activated.
Settings = 1 sec to 99 mins 59 sec. Default value = 99:59.
Also refer to: Loop Alarm, and On-Off Control.

Page 144 Glossary 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Manual Mode
If Manual Mode is enabled/disabled (from the control configuration sub-menu, or the
Auto/manual screen in operation mode if it is available) it causes a controller to enter or
leave manual control mode. Manual Mode can also be selected using a digital input if one
has been fitted and has been configured for this function. Switching between automatic and
manual modes is achieved using “bumpless transfer”.

Manual Mode operates as follows:


The setpoint legend is replaced by the word MAN and setpoint value is replaced by a %
output power value. This value may be adjusted using the  or  keys. The power value
can be varied from 0% to 100% for controllers using single control type, and -100% to +100%
for controllers using dual control type. It is possible to use a controller as a permanent
“Manual Station” by selecting Manual Control in the control configuration sub-menu.

Caution: Manual Mode should be used with care because the power output level is set by
the operator, therefore the PID algorithm is no longer in control of the process. The operator
MUST maintain the process at the desired level manually. Manual power is not limited by the
Power Output Limits.
Also refer to: Bumpless Transfer, Control Configuration, Control Type, Operation Mode, PID,
and Power Output Limits.

Master & Slave Controllers


The terms master and slave are used to describe the controllers in multi-zone applications
where one instrument controls the setpoint of another. These can be simple Setpoint
Master/Slave applications where the master controller transmits its setpoint to the slaves via
serial communications, or retransmits it as an analogue DC linear output signal. If serial
comms are used, the master controller must be able to act as a communications master
device and the slave must have a compatible communications option fitted. If DC linear
retransmission is use, the slave controller must have a matching a remote setpoint input. It is
possible to apply an offset to each zone if the slave has a Setpoint offset parameter or by
offsetting it’s remote setpoint input (or adjusting the scaling of this input).
Cascade Control is a type of Master & Slave application where the slaves setpoint is set
using the master controllers PID power output.
The terms Master and Slave are also used in a different context in relation to serial
communications.
Also refer to: Cascade Control, Linear Output, Retransmit Output, Remote Setpoint, Auxiliary
Input Offset, Serial Communications and Setpoint.

Minimum Duration Of Change


A form of alarm hysteresis unique to the Rate Of Change Alarm. It is the minimum time that
the rate of change in the process variable must be above the alarm threshold, before the
alarm will change state (from on to off, or off to on).
Settings = 1 to 9999 secs. Default value = 1sec.
Caution: If the duration is less than this time, the alarm will not activate no matter how fast
the rate of rise.
Also refer to: Alarm Hysteresis, Alarm Types and Rate Of Change Alarm.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Glossary Page 145


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Modbus RTU
Modbus RTU is the serial communications protocol used on instruments fitted with the
RS485 Communications module into Option Slot A. Alternatively, the Modbus TCP protocol
is available if the Ethernet Communications Module is fitted.
Modbus RTU is a Master/Slave protocol. Only the Master may initiate communications. Each
slave is given a unique address, and the message contains the Modbus address of the
intended slave. Only this slave will act on the command, even though other devices might
receive it (an exception is specific broadcast commands sent to address 0 which are acted
upon by all slaves but not acknowledged).
The commands can instruct the slave to change a value in one of its registers, or ask it to
send back one or more values contained in its registers. The Modbus RTU format follows the
messages with a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) checksum to ensure that the message
arrives undamaged.
This instrument can act as a Slave or Setpoint Master over RS485. In this mode the unit
continuously sends it’s setpoint value using Modbus broadcast messages.
Refer to the Serial Communications and Modbus Parameter sections of this manual for more
information.
Also refer to: Modbus TCP, RS485 and Serial Communications.

Modbus TCP
Modbus TCP is a version of the Modbus protocol for networks that support the Internet
Protocol, such as Ethernet. It is available if the Ethernet Communications Module is fitted into
Option Slot A.
This instrument can only act as a Slave when using Modbus TCP. The master device
initiates the communications, and the instrument only acts on the command if it has been
sent to its IP address. The data model and function calls used by Modbus TCP and RTU are
identical; only the encapsulation is different. Modbus/TCP does not require a checksum to
ensure that the message arrives undamaged.
Refer to the Serial Communications and Modbus Parameter sections of this manual for more
information.
Also refer to: Ethernet, Modbus RTU and Serial Communications.

Modulating Valve
A valve that can be positioned anywhere between fully closed and fully open by means of an
incorporated motor. A typical application would be controlling temperature in a furnace
heated by gas burners. This instrument can control modulating valves that have a positioning
circuit. These require proportional (mA or VDC) control signal from a linear output, relative to
the desired valve position. PI control is used for valve control.
To directly control the valves ‘open’ and ‘close’ motor windings, a special Valve Motor Drive
(VMD) controller algorithm is required. This instrument does not currently support this type of
algorithm.
Also refer to: Linear Output, PI Control, Proportional Control and Valve Motor Drive Control.

Page 146 Glossary 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Multi-Point Scaling
It the process input is connected to a linear input signal, multi-point can be enabled in the
Input Configuration sub-menu. This allow the linearization of a non-linear signal.
The Scale Range Upper & Lower Limits define the values shown when the input is at
minimum and maximum values, and up to 15 breakpoints can scale input vs. displayed value
between these limits. It is advisable to concentrate these break points in the area of the
range that has the greatest amount of non-linearity, or the area of particular interest in the
application.
Also refer to: Input Configuration, Linear Input, Process Input, Scale Range Lower Limit and
Scale Range Upper Limit.

mVDC
This stands for millivolt DC. It is used in reference to the linear DC millivolt input ranges.
Typically, these will be 0 to 50mVA or 10 to 50mV
Also refer to: Auxiliary Input, Input Range, Linear Input, mADC, Process Variable and VDC

On-Off Control
When operating in On-Off mode, the control output(s) will turn on or off as the process
variable crosses the setpoint in a manner similar to a central heating thermostat. Some
oscillation of the process variable is inevitable when using On-Off control.
On-Off control can be implemented only with Relay, Triac or SSR driver outputs. On-Off
operation can be assigned to the Primary output alone (secondary output not present),
Primary and Secondary outputs or Secondary output only (with the primary Output set for
time proportional or current proportional control). On-Off Control is selected by setting the
corresponding proportional band(s) to On-Off.
Also refer to: On-Off Differential, PID, Process Variable, Primary Proportional Band,
Secondary Proportional Band, Relay, Setpoint, SSR Driver, Time Proportioning Control and
Triac.

On-Off Differential (On-Off Hysteresis)


A switching differential, centred about the setpoint, when using On-Off control. Relay ‘chatter’
can be eliminated by proper adjustment of this parameter, but too large a value may increase
process variable oscillation to unacceptable levels. On-Off differential is also know as
hysteresis or deadband.
Settings = 0.1% to 10.0% of input span. Default value = 0.5%.
Also refer to: Input Span, On-Off Control, Process Variable, Relay and Setpoint

Operation Mode
The mode used during normal operation of the instrument. It can be accessed from the Main
Menu, and is the usual mode entered at power-up. The screens shown are incluse a main
screen with bar-graph, a trend view, information about the process, alarms plus optionally,
selection of auto/manual control, control output disabling. Recorder and profiler information
can be displayed if these features are fitted. Up to 50 configuration menu screens can be
defined with the PC software, and will be shown if the Custom Display mode is enabled in
the Display Configuration sub-menu.
Refer to the Operation Mode information in the Configuration & Use section.
Also refer to: Bar-Graphs, Configuration Mode, Custom Display Mode, Display Configuration,
Main Menu, Profiler Setup Menu, Recorder Menu. and Trend Display.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Glossary Page 147


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Output Configuration
A sub-menu of Configuration Mode used to adjust the parameters that relate to the Outputs
(Linear output type & scaling, output usage and scaling etc).
Also refer to: Configuration Mode and Linear Output.

Overlap/Deadband
Defines the portion of the primary and secondary proportional bands over which both outputs
are active (called Overlap), or neither is active (called Deadband). This is adjustable in the
range -20% to +20% of the sum of the two proportional bands. Positive values = Overlap,
negative values = Deadband.

OVERLAP Proportional Band 1


WITH PID
Output Power (%)

Output 1 Proportional Band 2 Output 2

Output 2 Output 1
Process Variable
Overlap
(positive value)

DEADBAND Proportional Proportional


WITH PID Band 1 Band 2
Output Power (%)

Output 1 Output 2

Output 2 Output 1

Process Variable
Deadband
(negative value)
Proportional
Band 1
Output Power (%)

Output 1 Proportional Band 2 = 0


OVERLAP &
Output 2 OFF

Output 2
Output 2 ON

DEADBAND
WITH ON/OFF

Output 2 Output 1
Process Variable
ON/OFF Differential

Positive values Negative values


Overlap/Dead

Figure 51. Overlap/Deadband

Page 148 Glossary 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Overlap/deadband is applicable if the primary output is set for On-Off control or there is no
Secondary Output. If the Secondary Output is set for On-Off, this parameter has the effect of
moving the On-Off Differential band of the Secondary Output to create the overlap or
deadband. When Overlap/Deadband = OFF, the edge of the Secondary Output Differential
band coincides with the point at which the Primary Output = 0%.
Settings = -20% to +20%. Default value = 0.
Also refer to: On-Off Differential, On-Off Control, Primary Proportional Band and Secondary
Proportional Band.

PD Control
Proportional and Derivative (PD) control combines proportional control with derivative action.
It is similar to PID control, but without Integral action.
Also refer to: Derivative, Integral, PID Control, Proportional Control and Tuning.

PI Control
Proportional and Integral Control (PI) is most often used for modulating valve or motor
control. It combines proportional control with integral action. It is similar to PID Control, but
without derivative action that can cause excessive valve movement.
Also refer to: Derivative, Integral, Modulating Valve, PID Control, Proportional Control and
Tuning.

PID Control
Proportional Integral and Derivative control maintains accurate and stable levels in a process
(e.g. when controlling a temperature). It avoids the oscillation characteristic of On-Off control
by continuously adjusting the correcting variable output(s) to keep the process variable
stable at the desired setpoint.
Also refer to: Control Action, Control Enable, Control Type, Controller, Correcting Variable,
Derivative Action, Integral Action, Manual Mode, On-Off Control, PD Control, PI Control,
Primary Proportional Band, Process Variable, Secondary Proportional Band, Setpoint and
Tuning.

PLC
This stands for Programmable Logic Controller. A microprocessor based device used in
machine control. It is particularly suited to sequential control applications, and uses “Ladder
Logic” programming techniques. Some PLC’s are capable of basic PID control, but tend to
be expensive and often give inferior levels of control.
Also refer to: PID.

Pre-Tune
The Pre-Tune facility artificially disturbs the start-up pattern so that a first approximation of
the PID values can be made prior to the setpoint being reached. During Pre-Tune, the
controller outputs full Primary Power until the process value has moved approximately
halfway to the setpoint. At that point, power is removed (or full Secondary Power is applied
for Dual Control), thereby introducing an oscillation. Once the oscillation peak has passed,
the Pre-Tune algorithm calculates an approximation of the optimum PID tuning terms
proportional band(s), integral and derivative. The Pre-Tune process is shown in the diagram
on the next page.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Glossary Page 149


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Setpoint
Process Variable

SP – Initial PV
2
Initial PV

Pre-Tune +100% Power (HEAT output)


engaged
here

Control Power

-100% Power (Cool output)

Figure 52. Pre-Tune Operation


When Pre-Tune is completed, the PID control output power is applied using the calculated
values. Pre-Tune limits the possibility of setpoint overshoot when the controller is new or the
application has been changed.
Pre-Tune can be selected from the Automatic Tuning Menu. It will not engage if either
primary or secondary outputs on a controller are set for On-Off control, during setpoint/profile
ramping or if the process variable is less than 5% of the input span from the setpoint. As a
single-shot operation, Pre-Tune will automatically disengage once complete, but can be
configured to run at every power up using the Auto Pre-Tune function.
Also refer to: Auto Pre-Tune, Control Type, Derivative Action, On-Off Control, Input Span, ,
Integral, PID, Primary Proportional Band, Process Variable, Secondary Proportional Band,
Self-Tune, Setpoint, Setpoint Ramping, and Tuning.

Power Output Limits


Used to limit the power levels of the primary and secondary control outputs. Normally the
instrument can set these outputs to any value between 0% and 100%. If this is undesirable in
a particular application, individual settings can limit the primary power upper and lower levels
and the secondary power upper and lower levels. The upper limit values must be higher than
the lower limits. These parameters are not applicable if that output is set for On-Off control.
Use with caution: The instrument will not be able to control the process if the limits do not
allow the outputs to be set to the correct values to maintain setpoint.
Lower Limit settings = 0% and 100% Default Value = 0%.
Upper Limit settings = 0% and 100% Default Value = 100%.
Also refer to: Control Type, On-Off Control and Setpoint.

Page 150 Glossary 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Primary Proportional Band


The portion of the input span over which the Primary Output power level is proportional to the
process variable value. Applicable if Control Type is single or dual. For dual control a
Secondary Proportional band is used for the second output. The Control Action can be Direct
or Reverse acting.
Settings = On-Off Control or 0.5% to 999.9% Default Value = 10%.
Also refer to: Control Action, Control Type, On-Off Control, Input Span, Overlap/Deadband,
PID, Secondary Proportional Band, and Tuning.

Process High Alarm n Value


An independent high alarm value parameter is available for each alarm that is set as Process
High type. It defines the process variable value above which Alarm n will be active.
Settings = Scale Range Upper to Lower Limit Default Value = Scale Range Upper Limit.
Also refer to: Alarm Operation, Alarm Types, Process Variable, Scale Range Lower Limit and
Scale Range Upper Limit.

Process Input
The main input used to monitor the value process to be controlled. This is known as the
Process Variable or PV. The input circuit is a “Universal” type, supporting all common
thermocouples and RTDs as well as DC linear mV, voltage or mA signals suitable for almost
any parameter that can be converted into a electronic signal. Linear signals can be scaled
into engineering units using the Scale Range Lower Limit and Scale Range Upper Limit
parameters.
Also refer to: Auxiliary Inputs, Input Span, PV Offset, Process Variable , Scale Range Lower
Limit and Scale Range Upper Limit.

Process Low Alarm n Value


An independent low alarm value parameter is available for each alarm that is set as Process
Low type. It defines the process variable value below which Alarm n will be active.
Settings = Scale Range Upper to Lower Limit Default Value = Scale Range Lower Limit.
Also refer to: Alarm Operation, Alarm Types, Process Variable, Scale Range Lower Limit and
Scale Range Upper Limit.

Process Variable (PV)


Process Variable is the parameter that is to be controlled to the actual setpoint value. It is
monitored by the main process input of the instrument, and can be any type that can be
measured by that circuit. Common types are Thermocouple or RTD temperature probes, or
pressure, level, flow etc from transducers that convert these parameters into DC linear input
signals (e.g. 4 to 20mA). Linear signals can be scaled into engineering units using the Scale
Range Lower Limit and Scale Range Upper Limit parameters.
Also refer to: Actual Setpoint, Engineering Units, Input Span, Linear Input, Process Input,
RTD, Scale Range Lower Limit, Scale Range Upper Limit and Thermocouple.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Glossary Page 151


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Process Variable Offset


The Process variable offset is used to modify the measured process variable value. Use this
parameter to compensate for errors in the displayed process variable. Positive values are
added to the process variable reading, negative values are subtracted. Caution: This
parameter is in effect, a calibration adjustment; it must be used with care. Injudicious use
could lead to the displayed value bearing no meaningful relationship to the actual process
variable. There is no front panel indication of when this parameter is in use.
Settings = ±input span Default Value = Off.
Also refer to: Input Span and Process Variable.

Profile Control Menu


If the Profiler option is fitted, the menu is available from the Main Menu. It allows the user to
choose the profile to run, and then control that profile (run, hold, abort, skip to next segment
etc.).
Refer to the Profiler Control Menu information in the Configuration & Use section.
Also refer to: Main Menu, Profile Setup Menu, Profiler and Profiler Mode.

Profile Events
Events are outputs that can be made active during a profile segment, or segments. There are
5 possible events, each of which can be defined to be active or inactive for the duration of
each segment, from the Profile Setup Menu. For end segments, events selected to be active
stay on until the unit exits from profiler mode or a new profile runs. It is possible to link event
outputs to certain alarm outputs in a logical AND situation.
Also refer to: Alarm Types, Logical Combinations, Profile Segments, Profile Setup Menu,
Profiler and Profiler Mode

Profile Header
The profile header contains information about how the profile starts and stops, the power
loss recovery action and if it should repeat.
Refer to the Profile Components information in the Profiler Option section of this manual.
Also refer to: Profile Segments, Profile Setup Menu, Profiler and Profiler Mode.

Profile Segments
Segments can be ramps, dwells, steps or special segments such as holds, ends or joins. A
maximum of 255 segments are possible, shared amongst up to 64 profiles.
Refer to the Profile Components information in the Profiler Option section of this manual.
Also refer to: Profile Events, Profile Setup Menu, Profiler and Profiler Mode.

Profile Setup Menu


If the Profiler option is fitted, the menu is available from the Main Menu. It allows the user to
set the General Profile Configuration parameters that apply to all profiles, and to create or
edit the Profile Header and Profile Segment Details. Profiles can also be deleted from this
menu. This menu is protected by a lock code.
Refer to the Profiler Setup Menu information in the Configuration & Use section.
Also refer to: Lock Codes, Profile Control Menu, Profile Header, Profile Segments, Profiler
and Profiler Mode.

Page 152 Glossary 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Profiler
A profiler controls the value of the actual setpoint over time; increasing, decreasing or
holding its value as required. This is used in applications where the rate of rise or fall of the
process variable must be closely controlled, or where a value must be maintained for a
period before moving to the next value.
If the Profiler option is fitted, up to 64 profiles can be created with a maximum of 255 profile
segments shared amongst them. Each segment can have up to five events active.
Refer to the Profiler Option section.
Also refer to: Actual Setpoint, Controller Mode, Profile Events, Profile Control Menu, Profile
Header, Profile Segments, Profile Setup Menu and Profiler Mode.

Profiler Mode
This mode is entered when a profile is run. In profiler mode, additional screens are added to
Operation Mode which show the status of the profile. These screens are not seen in
Controller Mode. The instrument will remain in Profiler Mode when the profile finishes or is
aborted unless the Segment End Type/Profile Abort Action is set to “Use Controller Setpoint”.
Also refer to: Controller Mode, Profile Control Menu, Profile Segments, Profile Setup Menu,
Profiler and Setpoint.

Proportional Control
Proportional control allows the correcting variable applied to the process to be set between 0
and 100% of the amount available. If the control type is dual, two outputs (primary &
secondary) are available, each of which can give proportional control. When the Proportional
Band(s) are correctly tuned, the process variable is maintained at a steady value, avoiding
the oscillation characteristic of On-Off control. Proportional control is most commonly used in
conjunction with Integral and Derivative action to give PI. PD or PID control.
Also refer to: Control Type, Correcting Variable, Derivative Action, Integral Action, On-Off
Control, PD, PI, PID, Primary Proportional Band, Process Variable, Secondary Proportional
Band, Setpoint and Tuning.

Rate
- Refer to Derivative Action.

Rate Of Change Alarm


An alarm based on the rate of change in the measured process variable. If the PV changes
at a rate greater than the alarm level, the alarm will activate. The rate of change must be
above the alarm threshold for longer than the Minimum Duration Of Change time, before the
alarm will change state (from on to off, or off to on). Caution: If the duration is less than this
time, the alarm will not activate no matter how fast the rate of rise.
Also refer to: Alarm Hysteresis, Alarm Operation, Alarm Types, Minimum Duration Of
Change and Process Variable.

Recorder Configuration
If the Data Recorder is fitted, a Recorder Configuration sub-menu is added to Configuration
Mode. This is used to adjust the recorder parameters (Recording mode, sample interval,
trigger and values to record) and to show the recorder status.
Also refer to: Configuration Mode, and Data Recorder

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Glossary Page 153


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Recorder Option
- Refer to Data Recorder.

Recorder Menu
If the Data Recorder is fitted, a Recorder Menu is added to the Main Menu. This is used to
control the recording (start, stop, delete recordings etc) and to show the recorder status. This
menu is protected by a lock code.
Refer to the Recorder Menu information in the Configuration & Use section.
Also refer to: Lock Codes, Main Menu and Data Recorder

Relay
An electromechanical switch operated by a solenoid coil. Relays are commonly fitted as
internal, time proportioning controller outputs. The limited current capacity and switching
cycles of internal relays means that they are usually connected to larger external slave
relays/contactors which are capable of switching much larger currents and are easily
replaced once worn out. A suitably rated RC snubber should be connected to relays to
protect nearby equipment from the effects of noise generated as they switch (refer to the
Noise Suppression details in the Electrical Installation section).
Also refer to: Current Proportioning Control, Latching Relay, SSR Driver, Time Proportioning
Control and Triac

Remote Setpoint (RSP)


If the alternative setpoint type is selected to be a remote setpoint, and the selected setpoint
is the alternative setpoint, an Auxiliary Input value will be use to adjust the controller setpoint.
The auxiliary linear input, is given a VDC or mADC signal, or in some cases potentiometer or
mV inputs. The Remote Setpoint value is constrained by the Setpoint Upper Limit and
Setpoint Lower Limit settings. Typical applications are Master/Slave and Cascade Control.
Also refer to: Alternative Setpoint, Auxiliary Input, Auxiliary Input Lower Limit, Auxiliary Input
Type, Auxiliary Input Upper Limit, Cascade Control, Linear Input, Local Setpoints, Master &
Slave, mADC, mVDC, Setpoint and Setpoint Select, and VDC.

Retransmit Output
A linear output VDC or mADC output signal, proportional to the Process Variable or Setpoint,
for use by slave controllers or external devices, such as a Chart Recorder or PLC. The
output can be scaled to transmit any portion of the input or setpoint span.
Also refer to: Input Span, Linear Output, mADC, Master & Slave, PLC, Process Variable,
Retransmit Output Scale Maximum, Retransmit Scale Minimum, Setpoint and VDC.

Retransmit Output n Scale Maximum


Scales a linear output module in slot n if it has been set up to retransmit PV or SP.
Retransmit Scale Maximum defines the value of the process variable, or setpoint, at which
the output will be at its maximum value. E.g. for a 0 to 5V output, it is the PV or SP value
corresponding to 5V. If this parameter is set to a value less than that for Retransmit Output n
Scale Minimum, the relationship between the process variable/setpoint value and the
retransmission output is reversed so that higher PV/SP values give a lower output level.
Settings = -1999 to 9999 Default value = Scale Range Upper Limit.
Also refer to: Process Variable, Retransmit Output, Retransmit Output n Scale Minimum,
Scale Range Upper Limit and Setpoint.

Page 154 Glossary 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Retransmit Output n Scale Minimum


Scales a linear output module in slot n if it has been set up to retransmit PV or SP.
Retransmit Scale Minimum defines the value of the process variable, or setpoint, at which
the output will be at its minimum value. E.g. for a 0 to 5V output, it is the PV or SP value
corresponding to 0V. If this parameter is set to a value greater than that for Retransmit n
Output Scale Maximum, the relationship between the process variable/setpoint value and the
retransmission output is reversed so that higher PV/SP values give a lower output level.
Settings = -1999 to 9999 Default value = Scale Range Lower Limit.
Also refer to: Process Variable, Retransmit Output, Retransmit Output n Scale Maximum,
Scale Range Lower Limit and Setpoint.

Reset To Defaults
This Configuration sub-menu selection returns all of the instruments settings back to their
factory defaults. It should be used with great care, as the action cannot be undone. A reset is
followed automatically by the Setup Wizard. Users must use this wizard and/or configuration
menus to set all of the parameters to the correct values for the intended application.
Also refer to: Configuration Menu, and Setup Wizard

Reverse Acting Control


Reverse action is required for applications where the primary control output will be used to
force the process variable up towards the setpoint. A typical application is a furnace. When
the control action is selected as reverse acting, primary proportional control outputs decrease
the correcting variable as the process variable increases within the proportional band, and
primary On-Off outputs turn off when the process variable exceeds the setpoint. The control
action of a secondary output is always the opposite of the primary output.
Also refer to: Control Action, Control Type, Correcting Variable, Direct Acting Control, On-Off
Control and Proportional Control.

RS485
RS485 (also known as EIA-485) is two-wire, half-duplex, multi-drop serial communications
connection. RS485 only defines the physical layer electrical specification, not the protocol
that is transmitted across it. It uses differential signals (the difference between the wires’
voltage) to convey data. One polarity indicates a logic 1, the reverse polarity indicates logic
0. The applied voltages can be between +12 V and -7 volts, but the difference of potential
must be > 0.2 volts for valid operation. RS485 can span distances up to 1200 metres using
inexpensive twisted pair wires. Data speeds can be as high as 35 Mbit/s over 10 m and 100
kbit/s at 1200 m.
It is recommended that the wires be connected as series of point-to-point (multi-dropped)
nodes (not in a star or ring format), with 120ohm termination resistors connected across the
wires at the two ends of the network. Without termination resistors, reflections of the signals
can cause data corruption, and electrical noise sensitivity is increased. The master device
should normally provide powered resistors, to bias the wires to known voltages when they
are not being driven by any device. Without biasing resistors, the data lines float and noise
can be interpreted as data when actually all devices are silent.
Converters between RS485 and other formats are available to allow computers to
communicate with remote devices. Repeaters can also be used to extend the distance
and/or number of nodes on a network.
Also refer to: Modbus RTU, and Serial Communications

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Glossary Page 155


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

RTD
Resistance Temperature Detector. A temperature sensor that changes resistance with a
change in the measured temperature. This instruments process input supports PT100
(platinum, 100Ω at 0°C) and NI120 (nickel, 120Ω at 0°C) sensors. These have positive
temperature coefficients (PTC) which means their resistance increases with higher
temperatures. The temperature measured by the sensor can be displayed as °C; °F or °K.
Also refer to: Input Range, Process Input and Thermocouple.

Scale Range Upper Limit


For linear inputs, this parameter is used to scale the displayed process variable. It defines
the displayed value when the process variable input is at its maximum value (e.g. if 4 to
20mA represents 0 to 14pH, this parameter should be set to 14). The value can be set
anywhere from -1999 to 9999 and can be set to a value less than (but not within 100 LSDs
of) the Scale Range Lower Limit, in which case the sense of the input is reversed.
Settings = -1999 to 9999 Default value = 1000.
For thermocouple and RTD inputs, this parameter is used to reduce the effective span of the
input. All span related functions work from the trimmed input span. The parameter can be
adjusted within the limits of the range, but not less than 100 LSD’s above the Scale Range
Lower Limit.
Settings = Range Max to Min. Default value = Max value of selected temperature range).
Also refer to: Engineering Units, Input Range, Input Span, LSD, Process Variable and Scale
Range Lower Limit.

Scale Range Lower Limit


For linear inputs, this parameter is used to scale the process variable into engineering units.
It defines the displayed value when the process variable input is at its minimum value (e.g. if
4 to 20mA represents 0 to 14pH, this parameter should be set to 0). The value can be set
from -1999 to 9999 and can be set to a value higher than (but not within 100 LSDs of) the
Scale Range Upper Limit, in which case the sense of the input is reversed.
Settings = -1999 to 9999 Default value = 0.
For thermocouple and RTD inputs, this parameter is used to reduce the effective range of the
input. All span related functions work from the trimmed input span. The parameter can be
adjusted within the limits of the range, but not less than 100 LSD’s below the Scale Range
Upper Limit.
Settings = Range Max to Min. Default value = Min value of selected temperature range).
Also refer to: Engineering Units, Input Range, Input Span, LSD, Process Variable and Scale
Range Upper Limit.

Secondary Proportional Band


The portion of the input span over which the Secondary Output power level is proportional to
the process variable value. The Control action for the Secondary Output is always the
opposite of the Primary output. The Secondary Proportional Band is only applicable when
Dual Control Type is used.
Settings = On-Off Control or 0.5% to 999.9% Default Value = 10%.
Also refer to: Control Action, Control Type, On-Off Control, Input Span, Overlap/Deadband,
PID, Primary Proportional Band and Tuning.

Page 156 Glossary 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Self-Tune
Self-Tune continuously optimises tuning while a controller is operating. It uses a pattern
recognition algorithm, which monitors the control deviation. The diagram shows a typical
application involving a process start up, setpoint change and load disturbance.

Setpoint 2
Temperature

Load Disturbance
Setpoint 1

Setpoint Change

Time
Figure 53. Self-Tune Operation
The deviation signal is shown shaded, and overshoots have been exaggerated for clarity.
The Self-Tune algorithm observes one complete deviation oscillation before calculating a
new set of PID values. Successive deviation oscillations cause the values to be recalculated
so that the controller converges on optimal control. When the controller is switched off, these
PID terms are stored, and are used as starting values at the next switch on. The stored
values may not always be ideal, if for instance the controller is brand new or the application
has changed. In these cases, the user can utilise Pre-Tune to establish new initial values.
Self-Tune will then fine-tune these values as it monitors any control deviation.
Use of continuous self-tuning is not always appropriate. For example applications which are
frequently subjected to artificial load disturbances, for example where an oven door is likely
to be frequently left open for extended periods, can lead to errors in the calculations. In
addition, because Self-Tune tunes for full PID control, it is not recommended for valve control
applications, which normally require PI control.
Self-Tune cannot be engaged if the instrument is set for On-Off Control.
Also refer to: Control Deviation, Modulating Valves. On-Off Control, Pre-Tune, PI, PID,
Setpoint and Tuning.

Sensor Break Pre-Set Power


If a thermocouple or RTD breaks, or it is disconnected, the instrument detects this condition
within 2 seconds, and sets the control output(s) to the value defined by the Sensor Break
Pre-Set Power Output parameter in the Control Configuration sub-menu.
Non-zero based linear inputs (e.g. 2 to10V or 4 to 20mA, but not 0 to 20mA) can also detect
a sensor break condition.
Also refer to: Input Range, Linear Input, RTD and Thermocouple.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Glossary Page 157


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Serial Communications Configuration


A sub-menu of Configuration Mode used to adjust the serial communications parameters.
(Addressing, data rate, parity, master/slave settings and write enabling).
Also refer to: Configuration Mode, Serial Communications

Serial Communications Option


A feature that allows other devices such as PC’s, PLC’s or a master controller to read, or
change the instruments parameters via an RS485 or Ethernet network.
Full details can be found in the Serial Communications sections of this manual.
Also refer to: Ethernet, Master & Slave, Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP, PLC, RS485 and Serial
Communications Configuration.

Setpoint
The target value at which the instrument attempts to maintain the process variable, by
adjusting its control output power (the correcting variable). There can be either one or two
setpoints. Local Setpoint 1 and/or an Alternative Setpoint. The Alternative Setpoint can be
chosen from Local Setpoint 2 or a remote setpoint input from Auxiliary Input A or B if either of
these is fitted. One setpoint can be chosen as the active at using the Setpoint Selection. The
value of the setpoints is limited by the Setpoint Upper Limit and Setpoint Lower Limits.
Also refer to: Alternative Setpoint, Auxiliary Input, Correcting Variable, Local Setpoints,
Process Variable, Remote Setpoint, Scale Range Lower Limit, Setpoint Lower Limit, Setpoint
Upper Limit and Setpoint Select

Setpoint Upper Limit


The maximum value allowed for setpoints. It should be set to keep the setpoint below a value
that might cause damage to the process. The adjustment range is between Scale Range
Upper Limit and the Setpoint Lower Limit. If the value is moved below the current value of a
setpoint, that setpoint will automatically adjust to keep within bounds.
Settings = Within Input Span Default Value = Scale Range Upper Limit
Also refer to: Input Span, Scale Range Upper Limit, Setpoint and Setpoint Lower Limit.

Setpoint Lower Limit


The minimum value allowed for setpoints. It should be set to keep the setpoint above a value
that might cause damage to the process. The adjustment range is between the Setpoint
Upper Limit and the Scale Range Lower Limit. If the value is moved above the current value
a setpoint, that setpoint will automatically adjust to keep within bounds.
Settings = Within Input Span Default Value = Scale Range Lower Limit
Also refer to: Input Span, Scale Range Lower Limit, Setpoint and Setpoint Upper Limit.

Setpoint Ramping Editing


Enables or disables the viewing and adjustment of the setpoint ramp rate in Operation Mode.
This parameter does not disable the ramping SP feature; it merely removes it from Operation
Mode. It can still be viewed and adjusted in the Control Configuration sub-menu. To turn off
ramping, the ramp rate must be set to OFF.
Settings = Enabled or Disabled Default Value = Disabled
Also refer to: Control Configuration, Operation Mode, Process Variable, Setpoint and
Setpoint Ramp Rate.

Page 158 Glossary 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Setpoint Ramp Rate


The rate at which the actual setpoint value will move towards its target value, when the
setpoint value is adjusted or the active setpoint is changed. With ramping in use, the initial
value of the actual setpoint at power up, or when switching back to automatic mode from
manual control, will be equal to the current process variable value. The actual setpoint will
rise/fall at the ramp rate set, until it reaches the target setpoint value. Setpoint ramping is
used to protect the process from sudden changes in the setpoint, which would result in a
rapid rise in the process variable.
Settings = 1 to 9999 LSDs per hour. Default Value = OFF
Also refer to: Active Setpoint, Actual Setpoint, LSD, Manual Mode, Process Variable,
Setpoint, Setpoint Ramp Editing and Setpoint Selection.

Setpoint Selection
There can be either one or two setpoints. These can be Local Setpoint 1 or an Alternative
Setpoint chosen from either Local Setpoint 2 or a remote setpoint input from Auxiliary Input A
or B if these are fitted. The Setpoint Select parameter in the control sub-menu defines
whether the Active Setpoint will be the Local Setpoint 1 only, the Alternative Setpoint only or
if the choice of active setpoint will be made from a digital input or an Operation Mode
selection screen.
Also refer to: Active Setpoint, Alternative Setpoint, Auxiliary Input, Digital Input, Local
Setpoints, Remote Setpoint, Setpoint.

Setup Wizard
A sub-set of the Configuration Menu parameters chosen to allow inexperience users to set
the instrument up for most simple applications. The parameters shown depend on the
options installed.
The Setup Wizard runs automatically at first ever power-up or whenever a Reset To Defaults
is carried out. A partial Wizard also runs whenever option modules have been changed. The
partial wizard only shows parameters affected by the changes made. The full Setup Wizard
can also be run manually from the Main Menu (this requires entry of a lock code).
Once completed, the Setup Wizard exits to Operation Mode.
Experts or users with more complex applications should select the parameters they wish to
set-up from the Configuration Menus instead of using the Wizard.
Refer to the Setup Wizard information in the Configuration & Use section.
Also refer to: Lock Codes, Configuration Menu, Main Menu, Operation Mode and Reset To
Defaults.

Solid State Relay (SSR)


An external device manufactured using two Silicone Controlled Rectifiers in reverse parallel.
It can be used to replace mechanical relays in most AC power applications. Some special
SSRs can switch DC, but most cannot. As a solid-state device, an SSR does not suffer from
contact degradation when switching electrical current. Much faster switching cycle times are
also possible, leading to superior control. The instrument’s SSR Driver output provides a
time-proportioned 10VDC pulse for to the SSRs signal input terminals. This causes
conduction of current from the line supply through the SSR to the load, when the pulse is on.
Also refer to: Cycle Time, Time Proportioning Control, Relay, and Triac.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Glossary Page 159


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Solenoid Valve
An electromechanical device, use to control the flow of gases or liquids. It has just two
states, open or closed. A spring holds the valve closed until a current is passed through the
solenoid coil forces it open. Standard process controllers with time-proportioned outputs are
used to control these valves.
Solenoid valves are often used with high/low flame gas burners. A bypass supplies some gas
at all times, but not enough to heat the process more than a nominal amount (low flame). A
controller output opens the solenoid valve when the process requires additional heat (high
flame).
Also refer to: Modulating Valves and Time Proportioning Control.

Supervisor Mode
Supervisor Mode allows access to a lock code protected sub-set of the main configuration
parameters. The unlock code is different from the higher level Configuration Menu unlock
code. Up to 50 Configuration Menu parameters can be chosen using the PC configuration
software. If none have been chosen, this mode is disabled.
Refer to the Supervisor Mode information in the Configuration & Use section.
Also refer to: Configuration Menu and Lock Codes

Thermocouple
A temperature sensor made from two different metals. They convert temperature difference
between their cold junction (the measuring instrument) and the hot junction, into a small
signal or a few microvolts per °C. Thermocouples are cheap and interchangeable, but the
wires connectors used must match the metals used in their construction. They can measure
a wide range of temperatures; some thermocouples can withstand very high temperatures
such as furnaces. The main limitation of thermocouples is accuracy.
The temperature measured by the thermocouple can be displayed as °C; °F or °K.
The colour codes for the common types are shown in the Thermocouple Wire Identification
Chart in the Electrical Installation Section of this manual.
Also refer to: Engineering Units, Input Range, Process Input and RTD.

Three Point Stepping Control


Modulating valves normally require a special “Three Point Stepping” control algorithm. This
which provides an output to move the valve further open, or further closed whenever there is
a control deviation error. When this error is zero, no further output is required to maintain
control unless load conditions change. This type of controller is often called a Valve Motor
Drive controller. This instrument does not currently have a three point stepping algorithm.
However, modulating valves that have a valve positioning circuitry to adjust the valve position
from a DC linear mA or voltage output signal can be controlled.
Also refer to: Control Deviation, Linear Output, Modulating Valve, and Valve Motor Control

Page 160 Glossary 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Time Proportioning Control


Time proportioning control is accomplished by cycling the output on and off during the
prescribed cycle time, whenever the process variable is within the proportional band(s). The
PID control algorithm determines the ratio of time (on vs. off) to achieve the level of the
correcting variable required to remove the control deviation error. E.g. for a 32 second cycle
time, 25% power would result in the output turning on for 8 seconds, then off to 24 seconds.
This type of output might be used with electrical contactors, solid state relays or solenoid
valves. Time proportioning control can be implemented with Relay, Triac or SSR Driver
outputs for either primary or secondary outputs.
Also refer to: Control Deviation, Correcting Variable, Current Proportioning Control, Cycle
Time, PID, Primary Proportional Band, Relay, Secondary Proportional Band, Solenoid Valve,
SSR and Triac.

Trend Display
Trend View is a graphical representation of recent process conditions. This feature is
available on all variants. It does not rely on the Data Recorder option, and does not retain the
stored data if the power is turned off. The trend shows the most recent 120 out of 240 stored
data points. Its scale adjusts automatically for the best resolution for the visible data. This
data can be the process variable; process variable & setpoint (shown as a doted line), or the
minimum and maximum value of the process variable measured since the last sample. Any
active alarm(s) are indicated above the graph. The user can scroll the right hand cursor line
back to examine all 240 data points. The sample interval and data to display is set in Display
Configuration.
Also refer to: Alarm Types, Display Configuration, Operation Mode, and Process Variable,
Setpoint.

Tuning
PID Controllers must be tuned to the process in order for them to attain the optimum level of
control. Adjustment is made to the tuning terms either manually, or by utilising the controller’s
automatic tuning facilities. Tuning is not required if the controller is configured for On-Off
Control.
Also refer to: Auto Pre-Tune, Controller, Derivative Action, Integral Action, On-Off control,
PID, Pre-Tune, Primary Proportional Band, Self-Tune, Secondary Proportional Band and
Tuning Menu.

Tuning Menu
The Tuning Menu can be accessed from the Main Menu. This menu is lock code protected.
It gives access to the Pre-tune, Auto Pre-Tune and Self-tune facilities. These assist with PID
tuning, by setting up Proportional band(s), Integral and Derivative parameter values. Tuning
is not required for On-Off control.
Pre-tune can be used to set PID parameters approximately. Self-tune may then be used to
optimise the tuning if required. Pre-tune can be set to run automatically after every power-up
by enabling Auto Pre-Tune.
Refer to the Automatic Tuning information in the Configuration & Use section.
Also refer to: Auto Pre-Tune, Derivative Action, Integral Action, Lock Codes, Main Menu, On-
Off control, PID, Pre-Tune, Primary Proportional Band, Self-Tune, Secondary Proportional
Band and Tuning Menu.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Glossary Page 161


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Triac
A small internal solid state relay, which can be used in place of a mechanical relay in
applications switching low power AC, up to 1 amp. Like a relay, the output is time
proportioned, but much faster switching cycle times are also possible, leading to superior
control. As a solid-state device, a Triac does not suffer from contact degradation when
switching electrical currents. A snubber should be fitted across inductive loads to ensure
reliable switch off the Triac. A triac cannot be used to switch DC power.
Also refer to: Cycle Time, Relay, SSR and Time Proportioning Control.

USB Menu
If the USB option is fitted, the USB Menu can be accessed from the Main Menu. This menu
is lock code protected.
The USB Menu allows the user to read or write files to a USB memory stick. The current
configuration of the instrument can be downloaded to the stick or the instrument can be
completely reconfigured using a pre-stored file that has been downloaded earlier, created
using the PC software, or even taken from another instrument.
If the Data Recorder option is present, the recordings can be downloaded to the stick for
transport to the users PC for analysis. If the Profiler option is present, profiles can be
downloaded to the stick or upload to the instrument using a pre-stored file that was
downloaded earlier, created using the PC software, or even taken from another instrument.
Refer to the USB Menu information in the Configuration & Use section.
Also refer to: Data Recorder, Lock Codes, Main Menu and Profiler

Valve Motor Drive Control (VMD)


This instrument can only control modulating valves that have a valve positioning circuitry that
adjusts the valve position according to the level a DC linear mA or voltage output signal.
Such valves normally require PI control instead of full PID.
Motorised modulating valves that do not have this type of circuit require special Valve Motor
Drive controllers which have a “Three Point Stepping” control algorithm.
Solenoid valves can also be controlled using the standard PID algorithm as the behave in a
similar way to relays, having just two states, open or closed.
Also refer to: Control Deviation, Linear Output, Modulating Valve, PI Control, PID, Relay,
Solenoid Valve, and Three Point Stepping Control.

VDC
This stands for Volts DC. It is used in reference to the linear DC Voltage input ranges.
Typically, these will be 0 to 5V, 1 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 2 to 10VDC. Linear outputs can also
provide DC voltages.
Also refer to: Auxiliary Input, Input Range, Linear Input, Linear Output, mADC and mVDC..

VMD
- Refer to Valve Motor Control.

Page 162 Glossary 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

16 PC SOFTWARE
The primary function of the software is to create, download and store instrument
configurations and profiles. Additionally, changes can be made to the operation of the
instrument; adding extra screens into Operation Mode, enabling and configuring Supervisor
Mode, changing the contact details or the function of the front LED’s. The software can also
be used to download a new language file or to change the start-up “splash screen”. An on-
screen simulation of the instrument can be setup and tested on a configurable load simulator.
A additional software tool is available to set the IP address required for the Modbus TCP
communications option - refer to the IP Address Configuration section.

Using The Software


The menus and button bar are used to select the main parameter screen or one of the other
modes or functions. Hover the mouse over the parameter description or value to view a fuller
description. Consult the comprehensive help (available from the Help Menu) for information
about the general software functions.
Menus Button Bar Parameter Address (hex) Parameter Values

Functional Groups Mode Drop Down Description Value Range

Figure 54. Main Parameter Screen


The main parameter screen is used to change all of the configuration and other settings. This
screen also allows access to the Supervisor and Enhanced Operation Mode configuration
screens from the Mode drop-down list. The Button bar or Device and View menus are used
to access the other software functions.
View & Device Menus Instrument Simulation

Parameter Configuration Profile Editor Trend

Figure 55. Button Bar & View Menu

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 PC Software Page 163


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Instrument Configuration
When creating a new configuration with the
software, the basic instrument type and the
options to be fitted to it must be defined in the
Device Selection screen. You can select these
from the drop down lists or by typing the full model
number in the Order number field.
Note:
It is important that the options selected to match
your unit.

Alternatively the complete instrument type and existing configuration can be uploaded to the
PC from your instrument, via the configuration socket or serial communications module or a
previously saved configuration file can be opened from the file open menu or button.
Once the required changes have been made, the configuration can then be download to the
instrument or stored to disk with a .bct file extension. The configuration file contains the
device information and configuration parameter settings, including any supervisor and
enhanced operation mode screens and changes to the LED functions. Profiles, splash
screens and language files are uploaded/saved separately.

A hard copy of the instrument configuration can be printed from the File | Print menu.

Parameter configuration
The main parameter screen contains all of the instrument settings broken down into
functional groups. The parameters can be changed in the yellow Value column. Type in a
new value or select from the list offered, as appropriate. The possible value range is show to
the left. If an invalid value is entered, it will be highlighted in red. Parameters are “greyed out”
if the are currently inaccessible due the hardware not being fitted or if they are disabled by
other settings.

Configuring Supervisor Mode


Users can access to a lock code protected sub-set of the configuration parameters if they
have be defined from the software. Up to 50 of the parameters can be copied into this mode.
To define these screens, first select Supervisor Mode from the mode drop-down list.
Select the functional group containing the parameter to be added. Highlight the parameter
Name and click the Add Entry button. The Move Entry Up and Down buttons are used to
change the order which the parameters will appear in Supervisor Mode. Unwanted entries
can be highlighted and deleted with the Remove Entry button.

Configuring Enhanced Operator Mode


Users can access sub-set of the configuration parameters at the end of the normal Operation
Mode screen sequence, if they have be defined from the software. Up to 50 parameters can
be copied in a similar manner to the Supervisor Mode selection by selecting Enhanced
Operation Mode from the mode drop-down list.

Page 164 PC Software 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Functional Groups Mode Drop Down Parameter List Selected Parameters

Add Entry Remove Entry Move Up Move Down

Figure 56. Supervisor/Enhanced Operation Mode Configuration

Profile Creation And Editing


Select the Profile Editor from the button bar or view menu. An existing profile file can be
opened from the file open menu or button, or uploaded from an instrument connected to the
PC via the configuration socket or serial communications module. The new profile can be
download to the instrument or stored to disk with a .pfl file extension.
New / Open / Save / Print Upload Profile Download Profile Mode Drop-Down

Header Parameters Header Values Profile Directory List

Figure 57. Profile Editor – Header

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 PC Software Page 165


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

If the option to uploaded a profile is chosen, a list of profiles in


the connected instrument is shown. The user can select the
required profile from the list.
A directory of existing profile in the instrument can also be
requested. This allows one or all of the profiles to be deleted.

When downloading a profile to the instrument via the


configuration socket or over serial communications, a list of
existing profiles and empty profile slots is displayed. The user
can select where to place the profile (a warning is shown if the
profile will overwrite an existing profile).

The number of free segments available is also shown.


A drop-down menu in the Profile Editor switches between the Profile Header and Segment
Data. Refer to the Profiler Setup Menu and Profiler Option sections for full details of the
header and segment data.
Header data includes a 16-character profile name, options for starting the profile after a delay
or at a specific day and time, the starting setpoint, the action to take after a power failure or
profile abort and the number of times the profile will run.
The segments are shown in Segment Data mode. The last segment is always an End, Join
or Repeat Sequence type, and cannot be deleted. The user can select and change any
segment’s type and values, and they can insert additional segments before the selected one.
A dynamically scaled graphic shows the segments of the profile, with the select segment is
highlighted in red. The five profile events are shown below the graph.
Insert Segment Un-Zoom Profile Directory Selected Segment (Red)

Segment List Segment Values Scaling Active Event

A hard copy of the profile, including the graph and events can be printed from the File | Print
menu.

Page 166 PC Software 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Changing the Start-up Splash Screen


The graphic shown during the instrument start-up sequence can be changed from the main
parameter screen. Select Download Splash Screen option from the Device menu. Choose
your new graphic file (most common file types are supported). The chosen image will
converted to monochrome and be rescaled to 160 pixels wide by 80 pixels high. For best
results, the image should be simple and have an aspect ration of 2:1. Complex graphics with
multiple colours or greyscales will not reproduce well. A preview of the results is shown.
Click the Download button to store it to the instrument.

Changing the Alternate Display Language


The alternate language can be changed from the main parameter screen. Select the
Download Language File option from the Device menu. Choose the correct file (language
files have a .bin extension) and click the Open button to store it to the instrument.

Instrument Simulation
A fully functional and interactive instrument simulation is included with the software. This is
linked to a simulated process, allowing changes to a configuration to be tested before use.

The simulated instrument can also be


accessed and configured by pressing
it’s “buttons” with your mouse, or by
using the 4 arrow keys on your
keyboard.

Active outputs are indicated in the


panel to the right

Figure 58. West ProVu Simulation

Configuring The Connection


The software can communicate with the instrument via the RJ11 configuration socket located
on the underside of the case, or via the Modbus TCP or RS485 communications options if
either is fitted. Refer to the wiring section for connection details.
A front mounted USB port is available on some models; this can also be used to configure
the instrument or transfer profile files, via a USB memory stick.
The configuration socket is intended for initial configuration of the instrument before installing
in the application. An RS232 to TTL lead (available from your supplier) is required connect
from the PCs RS232 serial port to this socket.
CAUTION:
The configuration lead/socket is not isolated from the process input or SSR Driver
outputs. They are not intended for use in live applications.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 PC Software Page 167


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

A communications settings screen is shown whenever the user attempts to connect to the
instrument from the software. The settings must be correct in order for communications to
work successfully. First select “Bus” as the Device connector, and select the PC Comm port
that you have connected to. For Modbus TCP, select Ethernet (bus coupler).
If connecting via the configuration port, the Start
and Stop bits must be 1 and Data bits 8. Parity
must be None, Bit Rate 19200 and address 1.

If the instrument has an RS485 module fitted, the


Address, Parity and Bit rate values must match
those of the instrument (even if you are connecting
via the configuration port). The Start and Stop bits
must be 1 and Data bits 8.

If connecting via the Modbus TCP


module, enter the instrument’s IP
address and set the Port address to 502

USB Memory Stick Folders & Files


If a USB memory stick is to be used to transfer files between the instruments and/or the
software, the files must be stored in specific DEVICE, CONFIG and PROFILE folders on the
USB stick. When saving files from the software to the memory stick, ensure that you save
them to the correct folder. Local storage on you PC can be in any folder of your choosing.
The USB option also limits the file name to 8 characters plus the 3 digit . bct or .pfl extension.
Longer file names will be truncated.

DEVICE – This folder must be located in the


Root of the USB memory stick
CONFIG – Configuration files (*.bct)
PROFILE – Profile program files (*.pfl)
RECORDER – Recorder log folders/files.
These can be created or saved from the PC
software.

CAUTION:
When saving a file, the data will be overwritten If the file name already exists.

Page 168 PC Software 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Network Configuration For Modbus TCP Options


If the instrument has the Modbus TCP communications option fitted, an IP address must be
assigned to it in order for it to communicate with the Modbus TCP master device over your
Ethernet network. The instrument can automatically receive an IP address if your network is
set up to assign addresses to Ethernet devices connected to it. Alternatively, a fixed IP
address can be assigned to it manually.
The Graphical Controller Ethernet Configuration tool is provided in order to discover or
assign the IP Address of the instrument and configure the internal settings.

Setting the IP Address


Install and run the Graphical Controller Ethernet Configuration software on your PC. Connect
the instrument to your network by plugging an Ethernet cable into the RJ45 socket on the top
of the case. If your PC is not connected to a network, the instrument can be connected to its
Ethernet port directly.

If your network assigns IP addresses


automatically, pressing the “Search
Network” button will list any of the
Graphical Controllers connected to it.
Their Network IP Address and MAC
Addresses are also shown. For most
fixed networks, only instruments that
have the same numbers in the first 3 Octets of their IP address can be seen by the PC. In
this case, use the method detailed in the “Fixing An IP Address” section below.
Highlight the instrument that you wish to
configure in the list and press the “Configure
Selected Device Button”.
The Current IP address on the network is shown
in the Edit IP Address tab, as is the current
configured IP address. A configured address of
0.0.0.0 means the instrument does not have a
fixed address, allowing it to receive one from the
network (via a DHCP, BootP or AutoIP server).

Set the value to 0.0.0.0 for automatic addressing,


or set a new fixed IP address and press Apply.
Note:
If this number does not match your PC’s
network addresses, further communication
with the instrument will cease.

Instrument Details
The Details tab can be used to confirm communications with the instrument. When opened
or refreshed, this tab collects the instruments Serial Number, Date of Manufacture and the
Contact Details information, confirming that the Modbus TCP communications is functioning
correctly.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 PC Software Page 169


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Edit Modbus Settings


The Edit Modbus Settings tab configures the
connection between the Ethernet module and the
instrument’s microprocessor. These settings
MUST match with the settings in the instruments
Communications Configuration menu. A faster
baud rate can be used if large amounts of data
are to be sent between the instrument and the
master, but in most cases, it is recommended that
the default settings are used.
Defaults:
Baud Rate 9600
Data Bits Eight
Stop Bits One
Parity None

Fixing An IP Address
If your instrument cannot be found using the “Search Network” button, the IP address can be
set from the Set IP Address option on the software’s System menu.

Enter it’s MAC Address and the new IP


Address (use 0.0.0.0 for automatic addressing)
then press okay.
If your instruments 12 digit MAC Address isn’t
know, it can be found on a label attached to the
RJ45 connector of it’s Ethernet module.

Page 170 PC Software 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

17 Appendix 2 - Specifications
Universal Process Input

General Input Specifications


Input Sample Rate: Ten samples per second.
Digital Input Filter 0.0 (OFF), 0.5 to 100.0 seconds in 0.5 second increments.
time constant
Input Resolution: Always four times better than display resolution. 16 bit ADC.
Supply Voltage Negligible effect on readings.
Influence:
Relative Humidity Negligible effect on readings.
Influence:
Temperature 0.01% of span/C change in ambient temperature.
Stability:
Input Impedance: V DC: 47KΩ
mA DC: 5Ω
Other ranges: Greater than 10M resistive
Isolation: Isolated from all outputs (except SSR Drivers) at 240V AC
PV Offset: Adjustable input span. +ve values are added to Process Variable, -ve
values are subtracted from Process Variable
PV Display: Displays process variable up to 5% over and 5% under span.

Thermocouple Input

Thermocouple Types & Ranges


Sensor Range in C Range in F Sensor Range in C Range in F
Type Type
B 100 to 1824°C 211 to 3315°F L 0 to 762°C 32 to °F
C 0 to 2315°C 32 to 4199°F N 0 to 1399°C 32 to 2551°F
D 0 to 2320°C 32 to 4208°F PtRh20%: 0 to 1850°C 32 to 3362°F
PtRh40%
E -240 to 1000°C -400 to 1832°F R 0 to 1759°C 32 to 3198°F
J (default) -200 to 1200°C -328 to 2192°F S 0 to 1762°C 32 to 3204°F
K -240 to 1373°C -400 to 2503°F T -240 to 400°C -400 to 752°F
Note:
Defaults to °F for USA units. Defaults to °C for non-USA units.
The Scale Range Upper Limit and Scale Range Lower Limit parameters, can be used to
restrict range. An optional decimal place can be displayed up to 999.9°C/F

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Specifications Page 171


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Thermocouple Performance
Calibration: Complies with BS4937, NBS125 and IEC584.
Measurement 0.1% of full range span 1LSD.
Accuracy: NOTE: Reduced performance for B Thermocouple from 100 to 600°C.
NOTE: PtRh 20% vs PtRh 40% Thermocouple accuracy is 0.25% and
has reduced performance below 800°C.
Linearization Linearization better than better 0.2°C (0.05 typical) for J, K, L, N and
Accuracy: T thermocouples; than better than 0.5°C for other types.
Cold Junction If enabled, CJC error is better than 1C under operating conditions.
Compensation:
Sensor Resistance Thermocouple 100Ω: <0.1% of span error.
Influence: Thermocouple 1000Ω: <0.5% of span error.
Sensor Break Break detected within two seconds. Process Control outputs go to the
Protection: pre-set power value. High and Senor Break Alarms operate.

Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) Input

RTD Types & Ranges


Sensor Range in C Range in F Sensor Range in C Range in F
Type Type
3-Wire -199 to 800°C -328 to 1472°F NI120 -80 to 240°C -112 to 464°F
PT100
Note:
The Scale Range Upper Limit and Scale Range Lower Limit parameters, can be used to
restrict range. An optional decimal place can be displayed up to 999.9°C/F

RTD Performance
Measurement 0.1% of span 1LSD.
Accuracy:
Linearization Better than 0.2°C any point (0.05°C typical).
Accuracy: PT100 Input complies with BS1904 and DIN43760 (0.00385Ω/Ω/°C).
Sensor Resistance Pt100 50Ω/lead balanced.
Influence: Automatic Lead Compensation: <0.5% of span error.
RTD Sensor Current: 150A (approximately).
Sensor Break Break detected within two seconds. Process Control outputs go to the
Protection: pre-set power value. High and Senor Break Alarms operate.

Page 172 Specifications 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

DC Linear Input

DC Linear Types & Ranges


Input Ranges Input Ranges
Type Type
mA DC 0 to 20mA 4 to 20mA V DC 0 to 5V 1 to 5V
mV DC 0 to 50mV 10 to 50mV 2 to 10V 0 to 10V

DC Linear Performance
Display Scaling: Scalable up to –9999 to 10000 for any DC Linear input type.
Minimum Span: 100 display units.
Decimal Point Decimal point selectable from 0 to 3 places, but limits to 5 display digits
Display: (e.g. values > 99.9 have no more than 2 decimal places).
DC Input Multi-Point Up to 15 scaling values can be defined anywhere between 0.1 and 100%
Linearization: of input.
Measurement 0.1% of span 1LSD.
Accuracy:
Maximum Overload: 1A on mA input terminals, 30V on voltage input terminals.
Sensor Break Applicable for 4 to 20mA, 1 to 5V and 2 to 10V ranges only.
Protection: Break detected within two seconds. Process Control outputs go to the
pre-set power value. Low and Senor Break Alarms operate.

Auxiliary Inputs

Auxiliary Input Types & Ranges


Input Ranges – Auxiliary Input A Input Ranges – Auxiliary Input B
Type Type
mA DC 0 to 20mA 4 to 20mA mA DC 0 to 20mA 4 to 20mA
V DC 0 to 5V 1 to 5V V DC 0 to 5V 1 to 5V
2 to 10V 0 to 10V 2 to 10V 0 to 10V
mV DC 0 to 100mV 10 to 50mV
Pot 2KΩ or higher

Auxiliary Input Performance


Input Sampling rate: 4 per second.
Input Resolution: 16 bit ADC.
Auxiliary Input Scalable as a Remote Setpoint (RSP) input between –9999 and 10000,
Scaling: constrained by the Setpoint Limits.
Measurement 0.25% of input span 1 LSD.
Accuracy:

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Specifications Page 173


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Input resistance: mV ranges : >10MΩ.


Voltage ranges: 47KΩ.
Current ranges: 5Ω.
Input protection: Voltage input: will withstand up to 5x input voltage overload without
damage or degradation of performance in either polarity.
Current input: will withstand 5x input current overload in reverse
direction and up to 1A in the normal direction.
Isolation: Reinforced safety isolation from outputs and inputs (except to Digital
Input B).
Sensor Break Applicable for 4 to 20mA, 1 to 5V and 2 to 10V ranges only.
Detection: Control goes to the pre-set power value if Auxiliary Input is providing the
active setpoint source.

Digital Inputs

Digital Input Functions


Function Logic High Logic Low
Profile Run/Hold Hold Running Profile Run or release selected profile
Hold Segment Release Release from Hold Segment No Action
Profile Abort Abort Running Profile No Action
Data Recorder Stop Recording Start Recording
Internal Setpoint Select Select Local Setpoint 1 Select Alternate Setpoint
Auto/Manual Control Automatic Control Mode Manual Control Mode
Control Outputs Enable PID Control Outputs Disable PID Control Outputs

Digital Input Performance


Type: Voltage-free or TTL-compatible.
Voltage-Free Operation: Connection to contacts of external switch or relay:
Open = Logic High. Minimum contact resistance = 5KΩ,
Closed = Logic Low. Maximum contact resistance = 50Ω.
TTL levels: 2.0 to 24VDC = Logic High.
–0.6 to 0.8VDC = Logic Low.
Digital Input Sensitivity: Edge Sensitive. Requires High-Low or Low-High transition to
change function.
Response Time: Response within <0.25 second of signal state change.
Isolation: Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs.

Page 174 Specifications 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Output Specifications

Output Module Types


Option Slot 1 Options: Single Relay, Single SSR Driver, Triac or DC linear.
Option Slot 2 Options: Single Relay, Dual Relay, Single SSR Driver, Dual SSR Driver, Triac,
DC Linear or 24VDC Transmitter Power Supply.
Option Slot 3 Options: Single Relay, Dual Relay, Single SSR Driver, Dual SSR Driver, Triac,
DC Linear or 24VDC Transmitter Power Supply.
Option Slot 4 Options: Quad Relay.

Single Relay Output Performance


Contact Type: Single pole double throw (SPDT).
Contact Rating: 2A resistive at 240V AC
Lifetime: >500,000 operations at rated voltage/current.
Isolation: Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs.

Dual Relay Output Performance


Contact Type: 2 x Single pole single throw (SPST) with shared common.
Contact Rating: 2A resistive at 240V AC.
Lifetime: >200,000 operations at rated voltage/current.
Isolation: Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs.

Quad Relay Output Performance


Contact Type: 4 x Single pole single throw (SPST).
Contact Rating: 2A resistive at 240V AC.
Lifetime: >500,000 operations at rated voltage/current.
Isolation: Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs.

Single Dual SSR Driver Output Performance


Drive Capability: 10VDC minimum at up to 20mA load.
Isolation: Not isolated from the universal input, Ethernet communications or
other SSR driver outputs.

Dual SSR Driver Output Performance


Drive Capability: 10VDC minimum at up to 20mA load.
Isolation: Not isolated from the universal input, Ethernet communications or
other SSR driver outputs.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Specifications Page 175


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Triac Output Performance


Operating Voltage: 20 to 280Vrms @47 to 63Hz.
Current Rating: 0.01 to 1A (full cycle rms on-state @ 25C); derates linearly above
40C to 0.5A @ 80C.
Non-repetitive Surge 25A peak maximum, for <16.6ms.
Current:
OFF-State dv/dt: 500V/s Minimum at Rated Voltage.
OFF-State leakage: 1mA rms Maximum at Rated Voltage.
ON-State Voltage Drop: 1.5V peak Maximim at Rated Current.
Repetitive Peak OFF- 600V minimum.
state Voltage, Vdrm:
Isolation: Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs.

DC Linear Output Types & Ranges


Input Ranges Input Ranges
Type Type
mA DC 0 to 20mA 4 to 20mA V DC 0 to 5V 0 to 10V
2 to 10V

DC Linear Output Performance


Resolution: Eight bits in 250mS
(10 bits in 1 second typical, >10 bits in >1 second typical).
Update Rate: Every control algorithm execution.
Load Impedance: 0 to 20mA & 4 to 20mA:
500Ω maximum.
0 to 5V, 0 to 10V & 2 to 10V:
500Ω minimum.
Short circuit protected.
Accuracy: 0.25% (mA @ 250Ω, V @ 2kΩ).
Degrades linearly to 0.5% for increasing burden (to specification
limits).
Over/Under Drive: For 4 to 20mA and 2 to 10V a 2% over/underdrive is applied (3.68 to
20.32mA and 1.84 to 10.16V). When used as control output
Isolation: Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs.
0 to 10VDC Transmitter Can be used to provide an adjustable 0.0 to 10.0V (regulated), up to
Power Supply* 20mA output to excite external circuits & transmitters.

24V Transmitter Power Supply Performance


Power Rating 19 to 28VDC (24V nominal) up to 20mA output, to for external circuits
& transmitters.
Isolation: Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs.
*see Linear output (above) for adjustable 0 to 10V Transmitter Power Supply

Page 176 Specifications 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Communications

Supported Communication Methods


Type Function
PC Configuration Socket Direct configuration using the PC Configuration Software
RS485 General serial communications using the Modbus RTU protocol.
Ethernet General serial communications using the Modbus TCP protocol.
USB Upload/download of configuration/profile files from the PC Software
or other instruments and download for Data Recordings.

PC Configuration Socket
Type: RS232 Serial Communications
Connection PC Configurator Cable to RJ11 socket under case.
Isolation: Not isolated from input or SSR Driver outputs. For bench
configuration only. CAUTION: Not for use in live applications.
RS485
Type: RS485 Asynchronous Serial Communications Module.
Connection Locates in Option Slot A.
Connection via rear terminals (refer to wiring diagram).
Protocol: Modbus RTU Slave or Modbus RTU Setpoint Broadcast Master.
Slave Address Range: 1 to 255.
Bit rate: 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200 bps.
Bits per character: 10 or 11 (depending on parity setting) plus 1 Stop Bit
Parity: None, even or odd (selectable).
Isolation: 240V reinforced safety isolation from all inputs and outputs.

Ethernet
Type: Ethernet Communications Module.
Connection Locates in Option Slot A.
Connection via RJ45 connector on top of case.
Protocol: Modbus TCP Slave only.
Supported Speed: 10BaseT or 100BaseT.
IP Address Allocation: Via DHCP or manual configuration via PC Tool.
Isolation: 240V reinforced safety isolation from the supply, inputs and outputs
(except SSR Drivers).
USB Socket
Targeted Peripheral: USB Memory Stick.
Connection Locates in Option Slot C. Connection via front mounted connector.
Protocol: USB 1.1 or 2.0 compatible. Mass Storage Class.
Isolation: Reinforced safety isolation from all inputs and outputs

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Specifications Page 177


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Display

Display Type: 160 x 80 pixel, monochrome graphic LCD with a dual colour
(red/green) backlight.
Display Area: 66.54mm (W) x 37.42mm (H).
Display Characters: 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, plus ( ) - and _
Trend View: 120 of 240 data points shown in a scrollable window. Data is not
retained when power turned off or if time base is changed.
Trend View Data: Displays any active alarm plus PV input (solid) & Setpoint (dotted) at
sample time or Maximum & Minimum PV input value measured
between samples (candle-stick graph).
Trend View Y-axis Scaling Auto scales for maximum resolution of display data, from 2 to 100%
of Input Span.
Trend View Sample Rate: 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 seconds or 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 minutes.

Control Loop

Tuning Types: Pre-Tune, Auto Pre-Tune, Self-Tune and Manual Tuning


Proportional Bands: Primary & Secondary (e.g. Heat & Cool) 0.5% to 999.9% of input
span in 0.1% increments, or On/Off control.
Automatic Reset Integral Time Constant, 1s to 99min 59s and OFF
Rate Derivative Time Constant, 1s to 99 min 59s and OFF
Manual Reset Bias added each control algorithm execution.
Adjustable in the range 0 to 100% of output power (single output) or -
100% to +100% of output power (dual output).
Deadband/Overlap: –20% to +20% of Primary + Secondary Proportional Band.
ON/OFF Differential: ON/OFF switching differential 0.1% to 10.0% of input span.
Auto/Manual Control: Selectable with “bumpless” transfer when switching between
Automatic and Manual control.
Control Cycle Times: Selectable from 0.5 to 512 seconds in 0.1s steps.
Setpoint Range: Limited by Setpoint Upper Limit and Setpoint Lower Limit.
Setpoint Maximum: Limited by Scale Range Upper Limit.
Setpoint Minimum: Limited by Scale Range Lower Limit.
Setpoint Ramp: Ramp rate selectable 1 to 9999 LSD’s per hour and infinite.

Data Recorder

Recording Memory: 1Mb non-volatile flash memory (data retained when power is off).
Recording Interval: 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 seconds or 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 minutes.
Recording Capacity: Dependant on sample rate and number of values recorded.
Example: 2 values can be recorded for up to 7 days at 10s intervals.
More values or faster sample rates reduce the maximum duration.
RTC Battery Type: VARTA CR 1616 3V Lithium. Clock runs for >1 year without power.
RTC accuracy: Real Time Clock error <1second per day.

Page 178 Specifications 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Profiler

Profile Limits: Number of profiles = 64 maximum.


Total number of segments (all programs) = 255 maximum.
Loop Back Segments: 1 to 9999 loops back to specified segment.
Profile Cycling: 1 to 9999 or Infinite repeats per profile.
Sequence Repeats: 1 to 9999 or Infinite repeats of joined profile sequences.
Segment Types: Ramp Up/Down over time, Ramp Rate Up/Down, Step, Dwell, Hold,
Join A Profile, End or Repeat Sequence Then End.
Time-base: All times specified in hh:mm:ss (Hours, Minutes & Seconds).
Segment Time: Maximum segment time 99:59:59 hh:mm:ss. Use loop-back for
longer segments (e.g. 24:00:00 x 100 loops = 100 days).
Ramp Rate: 0.001 to 9999.9 display units per hour.
Hold Segment Release: Release With Key-press, At Time Of Day or via a Digital Input.
Start From Value: 1st segment starts from current setpoint or current PV input value.
Delayed Start: After 0 to 99:59 (hh:mm) time delay, or at specified day(s) & time.
Profile End Action: Selectable from: Keep Last Profile Setpoint, Use Controller Setpoint
or Control Outputs Off.
Profile Abort Action: Selectable from: Keep Last Profile Setpoint, Use Controller Setpoint
or Control Outputs Off.
Power/signal Loss Selectable from: Continue Profile, Restart Profile, Keep Last Profile
Recovery Action: Setpoint, Use Controller Setpoint or Control Outputs Off.
Auto-Hold: Off or Hold if input >Band above and/or below SP for each segment.
Profile Control: Run, Manual Hold/Release, Abort or jump to next segment.
Profile Timing Accuracy: 0.02% Basic Profile Timing Accuracy.
<0.5 second per Loop, End or Join segment.
Segment Events: Events turn on for the duration of the segment. For End Segments,
the event state persists until another profile starts, the user exits from
profiler mode, or the unit is powered down.

Alarms

Maximum Number of Five “soft” alarms, each selectable for any of the supported alarm
Alarms: types.
Alarm Types: Process High, Process Low, Band, Deviation, Rate of Signal Change
(per minute), Sensor/input Break, Loop Alarm. Band and Deviation
(high or low) alarm values are relative to the current setpoint value.
Alarm Hysteresis: Adjustable deadband from 1 LSD to full span (in display units) for
Process, Band or Deviation Alarms.
Rate Of Change Alarm hysteresis is the shortest time (1 to 9999
secs) the rate of change must be above the threshold for the alarm
activate, or fall below the threshold to deactivate.
Combinatorial Alarms: Logical OR of alarms 1 & 2, 1 to 3, 1 to 4 or 1 to 5 or Logical AND of
alarms 1 to 5 with Profiler Events 1 to 5, to any suitable output.

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Specifications Page 179


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Conditions For Use

Reference Test Conditions


Ambient Temperature: 20C ±2C.
Relative Humidity: 60 to 70%.
Supply Voltage: 100 to 240V AC 50Hz ±1%.
Source Resistance: <10Ω for thermocouple input.
RTD Lead Resistance: <0.1Ω/lead balanced (Pt100).

Operating Conditions
Ambient Temperatures 0C to 55C (operating) and -20C to 80C (storage).
Relative Humidity: 20% to 95% non-condensing.
Altitude: Up to 2000m above sea level.
Supply Voltage: Either 100 to 240V ±10% AC 50/60Hz
or 20 to 48V AC 50/60Hz & 22 to 55V DC for low voltage versions.
Power Consumption: Mains versions: 20VA.
Low voltage versions: 15VA / 12W.
Source Resistance: 1000Ω maximum (thermocouple).
RTD Input Lead 50Ω per lead maximum, balanced
Resistance:

Standards

Conformance Norms: CE, UL, ULC.


EMC standards: Complies with CE EN61326.
Safety Standards: Complies with CE EN61010-1 and UL3121.
Pollution Degree 2, Installation Category II.
Front Panel Sealing: To IP66 (IP65 front USB connector). IP20 behind the panel.
(Not recognised / approved by UL)

Dimensions
1
Front Bezel Size: /4 DIN (96 x 96mm).
Mounting: Plug-in with panel mounting fixing strap.
Panel Cut-out Size: 92mm x 92mm (1/4 DIN instruments).
Depth Behind Panel: 117mm (1/16 DIN instruments).
Ventilation 20mm gap required above, below and behind.
Weight: 0.65kg maximum.
Terminals: Screw type (combination head).

Page 180 Specifications 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

18 Appendix 3 - Product Coding


Model Code V4-x - x - x - x - x - x - x - x - x - x - x - x - x - Sxxx
Regional Defaults
Non-US defaults 0
USA defaults 1
Graphical Controller/Recorder
Graphical Controller C
Graphical Controller with USB Port U
Controller/Recorder with USB Port R
Profiler
Not fitted 0
Profiler P
Supply Voltage
100-240VAC 0
24-48V AC/DC 2
Option Slot 1
Not fitted 0
Relay Output 1
SSR Driver Output 2
Linear DC Output L
Triac Output 8
Option Slot 2
Not fitted 0
Relay Output 1
SSR Driver Output 2
Linear DC Output L
Triac Output 8
Dual Relay Output 9
Dual SSR Driver Output S
24VDC Transmitter Power Supply T
Option Slot 3
Not fitted 0
Relay Output 1
SSR Driver Output 2
Linear DC Output L
Triac Output 8
Dual Relay Output 9
Dual SSR Driver Output S
24VDC Transmitter Power Supply T
Option Slot 4
Not fitted 0
4 Relay Output 1
Option Slot A
Not fitted 0
RS-485 Serial Communications 1
Digital Input 1 3
Aux Input A 4
Ethernet Port 5
Option Slot B
Not fitted 0
Aux Input B (including digital input 2) R
Option Slot C
Not fitted 0
Reserved 1
continued……

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008 Model Codes Page 181


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

Model Code V4-x - x - x - x - x - x - x - x - x - x - x - x - x - Sxxx


HMI & Manual Language
English 1
French 2
German 3
Italian 4
Spanish 5
Russian R
Packing And Manual Options
Single Packed with Concise Manual 0
Bulk Pack with 1 Concise Manual per unit – (Min 20 pieces.) 1
Bulk Pack without Manual – (Minimum 20 pieces) 2
Bulk Pack with 1 Full Manual per unit – (Min 20 pieces). 3
Single Pack with 1 Full Manual per unit. 5
Special Variants
Standard Model (Special features not fitted) Blank

Page 182 Model Codes 59407, Issue 1 – March 2008


ProVU4 Controller, Profiler & Recorder/Controller - Product Manual

BRITAIN FRANCE GERMANY USA


WEST INSTRUMENTS HENGSTLER SA PMA DANAHER CONTROLS

West Instruments Hengstler SA PMA Prozeß- und Danaher Controls


The Hyde Business Park, 69 Rue de la Belle Etoile - Maschinen- Automation 1675 Delany Road
Brighton Bat D - ZI Paris Nord II GmbH Gurnee
East Sussex 95700 Miramstraße 87 IL 60031-1282
BN2 4JU Roissy D -34123 Kassel USA
England France Germany

Tel: Tel: Tel: Tel:


+44 (0)1273 606271 +33 (1) 77 80 90 40 +49 (561) 505-1307 847 662 2666

Fax: Fax: Fax: Fax:


+44 (0)1273 609990 +33 (1) 77 80 90 50 +49 (561) 505-1710 847 662 6633

www.westinstuments.com www.hengstler.fr www.pma-online.de www.dancon.com


info@westinstruments.com mailbox@pma-online.de dancon@dancon.com
ASIA/ PACIFIC REGION – Contact:
Danaher Setra-ICG (Tianjin) Co., Ltd.
No.28 Wei 5 Road, The Micro-Electronic Industry Park TEDA,
Xiqing District, Tianjin 300385,
CHINA
Tel No: +86 22 8398 8096
Fax No: +86 22 8398 8099
www.danaher-scg.com.cn

59407, Issue 1 – March 2008

You might also like